Physics Paper 4

Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

* 9 4 3 9 9 8 5 6 4 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2018
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.

Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
DC (SC/SW) 149762/5
© UCLES 2018 [Turn over
2
1 (a) Define acceleration.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time axes for the graph of the motion of a car.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) The car starts from rest.
From time = 0 to time = 15 s, the car has a constant acceleration to a speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the car has a constant speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 32 s, the car has a constant deceleration of 2.0 m / s2 until it comes to rest.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph, using the space below for any calculations.
[5]
(ii) From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the path of the car is part of a circle.
For this motion, state
1. the direction of the resultant force on the car,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. what happens to the velocity of the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

3
2 (a) A force is used to move an object from the Earth’s surface to a greater height.
Explain why the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the object increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a train moving up towards the top of a mountain.
Fig. 2.1
The train transports 80 passengers, each of average mass 65 kg, through a vertical height of
1600 m.
Calculate the increase in the total gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the passengers.
increase in g.p.e. = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The engine of the train has a power of 1500 kW. The time taken to reach the top of the
mountain is 30 minutes.
Calculate the efficiency of the engine in raising the 80 passengers 1600 m to the top of the
mountain.
efficiency = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18 [Turn over

4
3 (a) Complete the statement by writing in the blank spaces.
The moment of a force about a pivot is equal to ......................................................................
multiplied by .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a horizontal rod of length 2.4 m and weight 160 N. The weight of the rod acts
at its centre. The rod is suspended by two vertical ropes X and Y. The tension in each rope is
80 N.
80 N 80 N
2.4 m
rope X rope Y
rod
160 N
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the name given to the point at which the weight of the rod acts.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the mass of the rod.
mass = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) The rod is in equilibrium.
Using data from Fig. 3.1, explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a cold plastic spoon that has just been placed in hot liquid in a cup.
plastic spoon
hot liquid
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules, why the temperature of the whole of the spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The plastic spoon is replaced by a metal spoon.
Describe an additional process by which the temperature of the whole of this spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The cup contains 150 g of liquid of specific heat capacity 4.2 J / (g °C). When the cold spoon is
placed into the hot liquid, the temperature of the liquid decreases from 80 °C to 56 °C.
Calculate the loss of thermal energy from the liquid.
energy loss = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus used to observe the motion of smoke particles that are in the air
in a box.
eye
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1
Light from a lamp enters the box through a window in one side of the box. The smoke particles
are observed using a microscope fixed above a window in the top of the box.
(i) The motion of a single smoke particle is observed through the microscope.
In the circle shown, sketch the path of this smoke particle.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the smoke particle follows the path that is observed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

7
(b) A tennis player is practising by hitting a ball many times against a wall.
The ball hits the wall 20 times in 60 s. The average change in momentum for each collision
with the wall is 4.2 kg m / s.
Calculate the average force that the ball exerts on the wall.
average force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum.
visible light
radio waves microwaves A B C D
Fig. 6.1
State the radiation in each of the regions represented by A, B, C and D in Fig. 6.1.
A ................................................................
B ...............................................................
C ...............................................................
D ...............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

9
(b) A source emits visible light.
Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of red light from the source incident on the face XY of a glass prism at
point S.
normal
i S
ray of
red light
Y Z
Fig. 6.2
The angle of incidence i of the ray is 35 °. The refractive index of the glass for red light is 1.5.
(i) Calculate the angle of refraction in the glass at S.
angle of refraction = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the refracted ray at face XY and the ray emerging from face XZ of the
prism. Label this ray R. [2]
(iii) A ray of blue light follows the same path as the ray of red light incident on the face XY.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of this ray in the prism and emerging from the prism.
Label this ray B. [2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) The speed of a light wave in air is 3.00 × 108 m / s. The refractive index of water is 1.33.
Calculate the speed of the light wave in water.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in air incident on a boundary with a
transparent plastic.
direction
of light wave
air
transparent
plastic
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1,
(i) draw the positions of the four refracted wavefronts in the plastic, [3]
(ii) draw an arrow to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave, [1]
(iii) label the angle of refraction r of the light wave. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

11
8 (a) The lamp of a car headlight is rated at 12 V, 50 W.
Calculate the current in the lamp when operating normally.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) A car is driven at night.
In a journey, the total charge that passes through the 12 V battery is 270 kC.
(i) Calculate the electrical energy transferred.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) The fuel used by the car provides 3.6 × 104 J / cm3.
Calculate the volume of fuel used to provide the energy calculated in (b)(i).
volume = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference graphs for a resistor and for a lamp.
6.0
current / A
4.0 lamp
2.0
resistor
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
potential difference / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the resistor is increased. Tick the box that
indicates the effect on the resistance of the resistor.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the lamp is increased. Tick the box that indicates
the effect on the resistance of the lamp.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(b) The p.d. across the lamp is 6.0 V. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

13
(c) The lamp and the resistor are connected in parallel to a 6.0 V supply.
Calculate the current from the supply.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The lamp and the resistor are connected in series to another power supply. The current in
the circuit is 4.0 A.
Calculate the total p.d. across the lamp and the resistor.
p.d. = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a straight wire AB placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.
The ends of AB are connected to a galvanometer.
N S
Fig. 10.1
When AB is moved vertically, the needle of the galvanometer shows a deflection.
State three factors that affect the size of the deflection.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
3 ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a transformer.
240 V P S 12 V
Fig. 10.2
(i) The primary coil P has 8000 turns and an input of 240 V. The secondary coil S has an
output of 12 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18
15
(ii) A circuit containing a resistor is connected to the terminals A and B.

A direct current (d.c.) is required in this resistor.
On Fig. 10.2, draw this circuit. [1]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) To ensure the safety of workers in laboratories where radioactive sources are used, describe
how radioactive materials
(i) should be stored,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) should be handled.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the table below for three types of emission from radioactive sources.
type of emission nature range in air absorbed by
electromagnetic radiation several km
helium nucleus 0.2 mm paper
electron
[3]
(c) State the type of radiation emitted when
an americium nucleus ( Am) decays into a neptunium nucleus ( Np),

241 237
(i) 95 93
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
a phosphorus nucleus ( 15 P) decays into a silicon nucleus ( 16 Si).

32 32
(ii)
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

* 5 4 9 8 1 5 2 3 9 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 14 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
DC (CE/SW) 150767/5
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle accelerating from rest.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the vehicle at time = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Without further calculation, state how the acceleration at time = 100 s compares to the
acceleration at time = 10 s. Suggest, in terms of force, a reason why any change has taken
place.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the vehicle between time = 120 s and time = 160 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a box.
box
Fig. 2.1
The electric motor that drives the lifting mechanism is powered by batteries.
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the batteries.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The lifting mechanism raises a box of mass 32 kg through a vertical distance of 2.5 m in 5.4 s.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the box.
gravitational potential energy = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The efficiency of the lifting mechanism is 0.65 (65%).
Calculate the input power to the lifting mechanism.
input power = ...........................................................[3]
(c) The batteries are recharged from a mains voltage supply that is generated in an oil-fired
power station.
By comparison with a wind farm, state one advantage and one disadvantage of running a
power station using oil.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18 [Turn over

4
3 A rectangular container has a base of dimensions 0.12 m × 0.16 m. The container is filled with a
liquid. The mass of the liquid in the container is 4.8 kg.
(a) Calculate
(i) the weight of liquid in the container,
weight = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the pressure due to the liquid on the base of the container.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Explain why the total pressure on the base of the container is greater than the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The depth of liquid in the container is 0.32 m.
Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

5
4 (a) Describe the movement of the molecules in
(i) a solid,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A closed box contains gas molecules.
Explain, in terms of momentum, how the molecules exert a pressure on the walls of the box.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

6
5 (a) A ray of light in air is incident on a glass block. The light changes direction.
State
(i) the name of this effect,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the cause of this effect.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1, drawn to full scale, shows a thin converging lens of focal length 3.5 cm.
1.0 cm lens
1.0 cm
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark each of the two principal focuses and label each with the letter F. [1]
(ii) An object O of height 4.4 cm is placed a distance of 7.5 cm from the lens.
On Fig. 5.1, draw rays from the tip of the object O to locate the image. Draw and label
the image. [3]
(iii) Determine the height of the image.
height of the image = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether the image is real or virtual.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
7
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts approaching a gap in a barrier.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows the gap in the barrier increased to five times the gap in Fig. 6.1.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]

8
(b) Describe, with a labelled diagram, an experiment using water waves that shows the reflection
of wavefronts that occur at a straight barrier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

9
BLANK PAGE

10
7 (a) State, in terms of their structure, why metals are good conductors of electricity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A cylindrical metal wire W1, of length l and cross-sectional area A, has a resistance of 16 Ω.
l
A second cylindrical wire W2 having length 2 and cross-sectional area 2 A, is made from the
same metal.
Determine
(i) the resistance of W2,
resistance of W2 = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the effective resistance of W1 and W2 when connected in parallel.
resistance of parallel pair = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The parallel pair of resistors in (b)(ii) is connected to a battery that is made from three cells in
series, each of electromotive force (e.m.f.) E. There is a current in each resistor.
(i) State the e.m.f. of the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The current in the battery is IB, the current in W1 is I1 and the current in W2 is I2.
Place a tick (3) in one box to indicate how these three currents are related.
I1 > I2 > IB
I1 > IB > I2
I2 > I1 > IB
I2 > IB > I1
IB > I1 > I2
IB > I2 > I1
I1 = I2 = IB
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

11
8 In a laboratory at normal room temperature, 200 g of water is poured into a beaker. A thermometer
placed in the water has a reading of 22 °C.
Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to the water one by one. The mixture is stirred after each
addition until the ice has melted. This process is continued until the temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 0 °C.
The total mass of ice added to the water is found to be 60 g.
(a) The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J/(g °C).
Calculate the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Assume that all the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker is transferred to
the ice.
Calculate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest a reason for any inaccuracy in the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice
calculated in (b). Assume the temperature readings and the values for the mass of the water
and the mass of the ice are accurate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]

12
9 (a) A student wants to demagnetise a permanent bar magnet. She suggests these steps:
1. Place the magnet in a long coil.

2. Switch on a large alternating current in the coil.
3. Switch off the current.
4. Remove the bar from the coil.
State and explain whether the steps will always be able to demagnetise the magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil supplied with current using a split-ring commutator.
coil
magnet
S
N split-ring
carbon brush
battery
Fig. 9.1
State and explain any motion of the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

13
(ii) The coil in Fig. 9.1 consists of three turns of wire. The magnetic field strength of the
magnet is M. With a current of 2.0 A in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect T.
The first row of Table 9.1 shows this data.
Table 9.1
magnetic field
number of turns current in the coil / A turning effect
strength
3 2.0 M T
3 8.0 M
6 2.0 M
M
3 2.0 2
Complete Table 9.1 to give the turning effect for the changes made to the arrangement
shown in Fig. 9.1. Choose your answers from the box.
T T T
8 4 2 T 2T 4T 8T
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Explain why the voltage of the supply to the primary coil of a transformer must be alternating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a transformer.
A
240 V 8000
mains turns
Fig. 10.1
There are 8000 turns in the primary coil of the transformer. The primary coil is connected to a
240 V mains supply. A 6.0 V lamp connected to the secondary coil operates at full brightness.
(i) Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil,
number of turns = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The current in the lamp is 2.0 A. The transformer operates with 100% efficiency.
Calculate the current in the primary circuit.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) The primary circuit contains a 2 A fuse.
Calculate the maximum number of lamps, identical to the lamp in (ii), that can be
connected in parallel in the secondary circuit without blowing the fuse.
number of lamps = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
15
222
11 Radon-222 is radioactive. It can be represented as 86
Rn.
(a) For a neutral atom of radon-222, state
1. the number of protons, ...........................
2. the number of neutrons, ...........................
3. the number of electrons. ...........................

[2]
(b) A radon-222 nucleus decays by α-particle emission to a polonium (Po) nucleus.
Complete the equation for the decay of radon-222.
222
86
Rn [2]
(c) Radon-222 has a half-life of 3.8 days.
At a certain time, a sample contains 6.4 × 106 radon nuclei.
Calculate the number of α-particles emitted by the radon nuclei in the following 7.6 days.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

* 5 7 1 8 2 9 1 8 0 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (LEG/SG) 152968/4
2
1 There is no atmosphere on the Moon.
A space probe is launched from the surface of the Moon. Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of
the space probe.
5000
speed
m/s
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 100 200 300
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Determine the acceleration of the space probe at time = 0.
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Between time = 0 and time = 150 s, the acceleration of the space probe changes.
(i) Without calculation, state how the graph shows this.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

3
(ii) During this time, the thrust exerted on the space probe by the motor remains constant.
State one possible reason why the acceleration changes in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the distance travelled by the space probe from time = 200 s to time = 300 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 A rifle fires a bullet of mass 0.020 kg vertically upwards through the air. As it leaves the rifle, the
speed of the bullet is 350 m / s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the kinetic energy of the bullet as it leaves the rifle,
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the maximum possible height that the bullet can reach.
maximum height = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The actual height reached by the bullet is less than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
(i) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the bullet, why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the bullet rises through the air, its kinetic energy decreases.
State what happens to this energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

5
3 On a particular day, the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. A bubble of gas forms at a point
5.0 m below the surface of a lake. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(a) Determine
(i) the total pressure at a depth of 5.0 m in the water,
pressure = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the pressure of the gas in the bubble.
pressure = ...........................................................[1]
(b) As the bubble rises to the surface, the mass of gas in the bubble stays constant. The
temperature of the water in the lake is the same throughout.
Explain why the bubble rises to the surface and why its volume increases as it rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

6
4 A beaker contains some water at room temperature. A student places a mercury-in-glass

thermometer in the water with the bulb of the thermometer just beneath the surface of the water.
Fig. 4.1 shows the arrangement.
thermometer
water
Fig. 4.1
The student uses an electric fan to blow air across the open top of the beaker. She notices that the
reading on the thermometer begins to decrease.
(a) Explain, in terms of water molecules, why the temperature of the water at the surface begins
to decrease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The student places the thermometer near the bottom of the beaker. The electric fan continues
to blow air across the top of the beaker. After some time, the student observes that the
temperature of the water at the bottom of the beaker is decreasing.
State the name of the thermal transfer method causing this and explain what is happening in
the water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

7
(c) The thermometer used in this experiment has a small range and a large sensitivity.
(i) State what is meant by
1. range,
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. sensitivity.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain the effect on the range of the thermometer of using a smaller bulb that
contains less mercury.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) A microscope that produces a very high magnification is used to observe the Brownian motion
of smoke particles in air.
Fig. 5.1(a) shows the apparatus used with the microscope. Fig. 5.1(b) represents the view
through the microscope and shows one of the smoke particles being observed.
smoke
particle
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1(a) Fig. 5.1(b)
(i) On Fig. 5.1(b), draw a possible path for the smoke particle. [2]
(ii) Describe how air molecules cause the smoke particle to follow the observed path.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a volume of gas in a cylinder.
piston
gas air at
atmospheric
pressure
Fig. 5.2
The piston in the cylinder is free to move. The piston moves to the left when the temperature
of the gas is decreased.
Explain, in terms of the molecules of the gas, why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
9
6 Sound is a longitudinal wave.
(a) Sketch a representation of a longitudinal wave. On your sketch
• indicate and label a distance to show the wavelength,

• mark and label the centre of one compression,
• mark and label the centre of one rarefaction.
[3]
(b) A longitudinal wave passes from one medium into another medium. The speed of the wave is
slower in the second medium.
State what happens to
(i) the frequency of the wave,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the wavelength of the wave.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

10
7 (a) A ray of light travelling in air strikes a glass block at an angle of 30° to the normal. The light
slows down as it enters the glass block.
State and explain, in terms of wavefronts, what happens to the light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The speed of light in this block of glass is 1.9 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

11
8 (a) A thin converging lens is used to produce an image I of object O.
Fig. 8.1 shows O, I and the screen on which the image is produced.
screen
principal axis
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw a straight line to represent a ray from the tip of the arrowhead of O to
the tip of the arrowhead of I. Draw a vertical dotted line to indicate the position of the
lens. This dotted line must extend above and below the principal axis. [2]
(ii) Draw a second ray from the tip of the object O to the tip of image I. This ray should pass
through a principle focus. Label the principle focus, F. [1]
(iii) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) Image I is further from the lens than object O is from the lens. Image I is described as
enlarged and inverted.
State and explain one other characteristic of I.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a spherical fishbowl, full of water, by a window. A black curtain hangs behind
the fishbowl.
window black curtain
fishbowl
bright
sunlight
water
Fig. 8.2
When full of water, the fishbowl can act as a converging lens.
Suggest one possible hazard of leaving the fishbowl next to the window in bright sunlight.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V.
12 V
A V
20 Ω
Fig. 9.1
The reading on the ammeter is 0.15 A.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance decreases.
(i) State what happens to the reading on the ammeter.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The battery is formed from cells of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5 V.
(i) Explain, in terms of electrical energy, what is meant by an electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of 1.5 V.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State how many 1.5 V cells are connected in series to form the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) A bar magnet is held with its N-pole just inside one end of a coil.
Fig. 10.1 shows the coil connected to a galvanometer that has the zero mark in the centre of
the scale.
L
N S
Fig. 10.1
The magnet is pulled horizontally to the right at a constant speed through a large distance.
(i) State what happens to the galvanometer reading as time passes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the magnet moves, an N-pole is produced at the left-hand end L of the coil.
Explain why the pole at L is an N-pole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A transformer has NP turns on the primary coil and NS turns on the secondary coil. The
transformer is used in a school laboratory as a 12 V alternating current (a.c.) supply. The
transformer is powered from the 240 V a.c. mains supply.
(i) Determine the turns ratio NP / NS of the transformer.
NP / NS = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The laboratory 12 V a.c. supply is rectified to produce a direct current (d.c.) supply.
Underline the component that the rectification circuit must include.
AND gate diode NOT gate potentiometer thermistor

[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
15
11 (a) State the type of radioactive emission that causes
(i) the proton number of a nuclide to increase by 1,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number of a nuclide to decrease by 4,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) no change in the proton number and no change in the nucleon number of a nuclide.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The isotope radon-220 is radioactive and it decays by α-particle emission.
(i) Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of α-particles entering the electric field between two charged
plates.
charged plate
+ + + + + + + + + +
electric
field
beam of
α-particles
– – – – – – – – – –
charged plate
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, sketch the path that the beam of α-particles follows in the electric field. [1]
(ii) The half-life of radon-220 is 56 s.
A sample of this isotope contains 7.2 × 106 atoms.
Predict the number of α-particles that the radon-220 in the sample emits in the next
168 s.
number of α-particles emitted = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

* 0 9 3 9 7 7 2 1 6 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 150768/5
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes of a distance-time graph for an object moving in a straight line.
80
distance / m
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) 1. On Fig. 1.1, draw between time = 0 and time = 10 s, the graph for an object moving
with a constant speed of 5.0 m / s. Start your graph at distance = 0 m.
2. State the property of the graph that represents speed.
....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Between time = 10 s and time = 20 s the object accelerates. The speed at time = 20 s is
9.0 m / s.
Calculate the average acceleration between time = 10 s and time = 20 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes of a speed-time graph for a different object.
50
speed
m/s
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(i) The object has an initial speed of 50 m / s and decelerates uniformly at 0.35 m / s2 for
100 s.
On Fig. 1.2, draw the graph to represent the motion of the object. [2]
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by the object from time = 0 to time = 100 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hollow metal cylinder containing air, floating in the sea.
surface
of sea air
1.8 m
1.2 m
seawater
bottom
Fig. 2.1
(a) The density of the metal used to make the cylinder is greater than the density of seawater.
Explain why the cylinder floats.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The cylinder has a length of 1.8 m. It floats with 1.2 m submerged in the sea. The bottom of
the cylinder has an area of cross-section of 0.80 m2.
The density of seawater is 1020 kg / m3. Calculate the force exerted on the bottom of the
cylinder due to the depth of the seawater.
force = ...........................................................[4]
(c) Deduce the weight of the cylinder. Explain your answer.
weight = ...............................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18
5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft on the deck of an aircraft carrier.
Fig. 3.1
The aircraft accelerates from rest along the deck. At take-off, the aircraft has a speed of 75 m / s.
The mass of the aircraft is 9500 kg.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the aircraft at take-off.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(b) On an aircraft carrier, a catapult provides an accelerating force on the aircraft. The catapult
provides a constant force for a distance of 150 m along the deck.
Calculate the resultant force on the aircraft as it accelerates. Assume that all of the kinetic
energy at take-off is from the work done on the aircraft by the catapult.
force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 represents an atom.
Fig. 4.1
Representing atoms by circles approximately the same size as in Fig. 4.1, sketch
(i) on Fig. 4.2, the arrangement of atoms in a crystalline solid, [1]
(ii) on Fig. 4.3, the arrangement of atoms in a gas. [1]
solid gas
Fig. 4.2 Fig. 4.3
(b) (i) Describe the motion of the atoms in a solid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A sculptor makes a statue from a block of crystalline rock using a cutting tool. Explain
why he must apply a large force to the tool to remove a small piece of rock.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A helium-filled balloon in the room of a house suddenly bursts.
State and explain, in terms of atoms, what happens to the helium from the balloon after the
balloon has burst.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

7
5 A student wants to investigate good and bad absorbers of thermal radiation. She has the apparatus
shown in Fig. 5.1, a supply of cold water and a metre rule.
small polished small 2 thermometers electric heater

can black-painted
can
Fig. 5.1
Explain how the student could use the apparatus she has available to carry out her investigation.
Describe the results she would expect to obtain. Draw a diagram of the set-up.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]

8
6 (a) Circle two of the following that apply to an ultrasound wave travelling in air.
frequency 3.5 Hz frequency 350 Hz frequency 35 000 Hz longitudinal
transverse speed 1.5 m / s speed 1.5 × 103 m / s speed 1.5 × 106 m / s
[2]
(b) Calculate the wavelength in a vacuum of X-rays of frequency 1.3 × 1017 Hz.
wavelength = ...........................................................[3]
(c) A dentist takes an X-ray photograph of a patient’s teeth. Explain why it is safe for the patient
to be close to the source of X-rays, but the dentist must stand away from the source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State, with a reason, why microwave ovens are designed only to work with the door closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

9
BLANK PAGE

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light in water that is incident on a submerged, transparent plastic
block.
water
plastic
Fig. 7.1
State what happens to the speed of light as it enters the plastic block. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the two principal focuses F1 and F2 of a thin converging lens.
F1 F2
O
lens
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 7.2
Fig. 7.2 also shows an object O of height 1.2 cm placed close to the lens. Two rays from the
tip of the object O are incident on the lens.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

11
(i) On Fig. 7.2, continue the paths of these two rays for a further distance of at least 5 cm.
[2]
(ii) Using your answer to (b)(i), find and mark on Fig. 7.2 the image I of object O and label
this image. [2]
(iii) Determine the height of image I.
height = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether I is a real image or a virtual image.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit that contains a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 6.0 V, an ammeter, a
20 Ω resistor and component X.
6.0 V
A X
20 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) State the name of component X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) across the 20 Ω resistor is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(b) The p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor is varied from zero to 6.0 V. For each value of p.d. a
corresponding current is measured.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

13
On Fig. 8.2, draw a line to indicate how the current measured by the ammeter depends on
the p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor.
0.40
current / A
0.30
0.20
0.10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 8.2 [3]
(c) A second resistor is connected into the circuit in parallel with the 20 Ω resistor.
(i) State how the combined resistance of the two resistors in parallel compares with the
resistance of each of the resistors on its own.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The p.d. across the two parallel resistors is changed and the current in the battery for
each value of the p.d. is measured. A second line could be drawn on Fig. 8.2 to indicate
how the current measured by the ammeter depends on the p.d. across the two resistors
in parallel.
State how the second line differs from the original line. You are not expected to draw this
second line.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

14
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil ABCD with two turns. The coil is in a magnetic field.
B C
N S
A D
Fig. 9.1
When there is a current in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect.
(i) Explain why there is a turning effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The value of the current is 3 A. Place one tick in each column of the table to indicate how
the turning effect changes with the change described.
turning effect number of turns on coil current strength of magnetic

increased to six increased to 9 A field decreased by a
factor of 2
decreased by factor of 4
no change
increased by factor of 2
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

15
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a magnet held just below a vertical coil connected to a galvanometer.
Fig. 9.2
The magnet is released.
(i) State any effect on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State any effect on the magnetic field produced by the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

16
10 (a) An uncharged conducting metal plate rests on insulating supports. Fig. 10.1 shows the plate
and a positively charged insulating plastic sheet placed on top of the metal plate.
plastic sheet
metal plate
insulating support insulating support
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe any flow of charge that takes place when the plastic sheet is placed onto the
metal plate.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw how charges are now arranged within the metal plate. [1]
(iii) State and explain if this arrangement of charge helps to keep the plastic sheet in place.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

17
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows two uncharged conducting spheres suspended on insulating threads.
Fig. 10.2
1. The spheres are now both given positive charges. On Fig. 10.2, draw a possible position
of each sphere and thread.
2. Explain the positions you have drawn.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

18
11 (a) A radioactive nucleus of uranium-235 decays to a nucleus of thorium and emits an α-particle.
Complete the equation.
235 ....... 4
92 U .......
Th + 2α
[2]
(b) A nucleus of uranium-235 undergoes nuclear fission in a reactor.
(i) State what is meant by nuclear fission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why a nuclear reactor is surrounded by thick concrete walls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage of using a
fission reactor to generate electrical energy in a power station.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The thorium produced by the decay in (a) is also radioactive and has a half-life of 26 hours.
At a certain time, a pure sample of this isotope initially contains 4.8 × 109 atoms.
Calculate the number of atoms of this sample that decay in the following 52 hours.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

* 6 0 7 6 5 3 3 6 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2018
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151946/4
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for a moving car.
500
distance / m
400
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, mark a point P where the acceleration of the car is zero. [1]
(b) Determine:
(i) the speed of the car at time t = 15 s
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average speed of the car between time t = 30 s and time t = 45 s.
average speed = ...........................................................[2]
(c) At time t = 45 s, the car starts to decelerate. At time t = 55 s and at a distance of 400 m from
the starting point, the car stops. It then remains stationary for 5.0 s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw a possible continuation of the distance-time graph. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

3
2 (a) Complete Fig. 2.1 by writing in the right-hand column the name of the quantity given by the
product in the left-hand column.
product quantity
mass × acceleration
force × time
[2]
Fig. 2.1
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a man hitting a ball with a golf club.
golf club ball
Fig. 2.2
The ball has a mass of 0.046 kg. The golf club is in contact with the ball for 5.0 × 10–4 s and
the ball leaves the golf club at a speed of 65 m / s.
(i) Calculate:
1. the momentum of the ball as it leaves the golf club
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force acting on the ball while it is in contact with the golf club.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) While the golf club is in contact with the ball, the ball becomes compressed and changes
shape.
State the type of energy stored in the ball during its contact with the golf club.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18 [Turn over

4
3 The density of mercury is 1.4 × 104 kg / m3.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows an instrument that is being used to determine the atmospheric pressure.
space A
760 mm
mercury
Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)
(i) State the name of the instrument.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what is in space A.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the atmospheric pressure.
atmospheric pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows mercury stored in a cylindrical glass jar of internal radius 4.0 cm. The depth of
mercury in the jar is 12 cm.
mercury
12 cm
8.0 cm
Calculate the weight of mercury in the jar.
weight = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18
5
4 A wave is travelling across the surface of water in a tank at a speed of 0.15 m / s.
(a) The wavelength of the wave is 0.030 m.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(b) This water wave is a transverse wave.
(i) Explain what is meant by the term transverse wave motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Draw a diagram that represents a transverse wave travelling from left to right across the
page. On your diagram, label:
• the wavelength
• the amplitude.
[3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 (a) A student is supplied with a small block of iron, a thermometer and an electrical heater of
power P.
There are two holes drilled in the iron block. The heater fits tightly into one hole and the
student places the thermometer into the other hole.
Fig. 5.1 shows the equipment.
cable
thermometer
heater
iron block
Fig. 5.1
The student uses this equipment when determining the specific heat capacity of iron.
State:
• the other equipment the student will need

• the measurements the student needs to take
• the equation used when calculating the value of the specific heat capacity of iron.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

7
(b) In the student’s home there is a wood-burning stove, which is also made of iron. The mass of
the wood-burning stove is 85 kg.
(i) State what is meant by the thermal capacity of an object.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of iron is 460 J / (kg °C).

Calculate the thermal capacity of the wood-burning stove.
thermal capacity = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at point X on a glass prism.
screen
prism
ray of white light
Fig. 6.1
(i) From point X on Fig. 6.1, draw a ray of red light, labelled R and a ray of violet light,
labelled V, to show how a spectrum is formed on the screen. [2]
(ii) State the colour of light in the visible spectrum with the shortest wavelength.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The critical angle for a type of glass is 42°.
Fig. 6.2 and Fig. 6.3 show two prisms ABC and PQR made of this type of glass. A ray of
monochromatic red light passes into each of the prisms.
A P
45° normal 60° Y normal
45° 60°
B C Q R
Fig. 6.2 Fig. 6.3
(i) State what is meant by monochromatic light.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

9
(ii) Describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in Fig. 6.2 as it strikes side AC of
the prism.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in Fig. 6.3 as it strikes the glass at
point Y.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

10
7 A defibrillator is a machine that sends an electrical charge through the heart of a patient whose
heart is not beating correctly. Doctors learn to use a defibrillator by practising on a medical dummy.
Fig. 7.1 shows the two contacts of a defibrillator attached to a medical dummy.
contacts
defibrillator
medical
dummy
Fig. 7.1
The contacts that touch the dummy are made from metal, and when the defibrillator is being used,
one contact becomes strongly negatively charged and the other contact becomes strongly positively
charged. The handles of the contacts are made from plastic, which is an electrical insulator.
(a) (i) State how the structure of an electrical insulator differs from the structure of a conductor.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the handles are made from an electrical insulator.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of the particles involved, how one contact becomes negatively charged and
how the other contact becomes positively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The defibrillator passes a charge of 9.1 × 10–3 C through the medical dummy in 6.5 × 10–4 s.
Calculate the average current in the dummy.
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18
11
8 A 9.0 V battery is connected to a 120 Ω resistor in series with wire P.

Fig. 8.1 shows a voltmeter connected across the 120 Ω resistor.
9.0 V
120 Ω
P
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the energy changes that are taking place in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The reading on the voltmeter is 2.4 V.
Calculate:
(i) the current in the 120 Ω resistor
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across wire P
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the resistance of wire P.
resistance = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Wire P has a diameter d and a length l. A second piece of wire Q is made of the same
material as P.
The diameter of wire Q is 0.50 × d and its length is 5.0 × l.
Calculate the resistance of wire Q.
resistance = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 10]
12
9 (a) Describe how a direct current (d.c.) differs from an alternating current (a.c.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows how the voltage output of an a.c. generator varies with time.
8.0
voltage / V
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / s
–2.0
–4.0
–6.0
–8.0
Fig. 9.1
A heater is connected directly to the a.c. generator and the maximum current in the heater is
0.75 A.
(i) On Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to indicate how the current in the heater varies with time.
1.00
current / A
0.75
0.50
0.25
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / s
–0.25
–0.50
–0.75
–1.00
[1]
Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

13
(ii) Calculate the power produced by the heater when the current is 0.75 A.
power = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 9.3 shows the coil ABCD of the a.c. generator between two magnetic poles.
rotation
direction
B C
N A D S
Fig. 9.3
(i) On Fig. 9.3, draw a straight arrow to indicate the direction in which side AB of the coil is
moving. Label this arrow M. [1]
(ii) Deduce the direction of the current induced in side AB of the coil and explain your
reasoning.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) The rate at which the coil of the a.c. generator rotates increases.
State two ways in which the alternating voltage changes.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
14
10 Thorium-234 (23940Th) is radioactive. It decays by β-emission to form an isotope of protactinium

(Pa).
(a) Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
..... .....
234Th Pa + β
90 ..... .....
[2]
(b) A pure sample of thorium-234 emits β-particles at a count rate of 2480 counts / second.
The half-life of thorium-234 is 24 days.
Calculate the count rate for the emission of β-particles from the thorium in the sample after
72 days have passed.
count rate ...........................................................[3]
(c) The isotope of protactinium in (a) is also radioactive. It decays by β-emission and has a
half-life of 70 seconds.
State and explain how this would affect the observed count rate for the sample in (b) after
72 days.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

* 6 7 5 4 0 7 4 2 4 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151944/4
2
1 A lorry is travelling along a straight, horizontal road.
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the lorry.
3000
distance / m
2000
1000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using Fig. 1.1, determine:
(i) the speed of the lorry at time t = 30 s
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average speed of the lorry between time t = 60 s and time t = 120 s.
average speed = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

3
(b) At time t = 30 s, the total resistive force acting on the lorry is 1.4 × 104 N.
(i) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the magnitude of the acceleration of the lorry at time t = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Determine the forward force on the lorry due to its engine at time t = 30 s.
forward force = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Describe the motion of the lorry between time t = 60 s and time t = 130 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) Fig 2.1 shows liquid in a cylinder.
cylinder
liquid
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1 gives some data about the cylinder and the liquid.
Table 2.1
radius of cylinder 3.5 cm

weight of empty cylinder 2.5 N
depth of liquid 12.0 cm
density of liquid 900 kg / m3
The cylinder containing liquid is placed on a digital balance that displays the mass in kg.
Calculate the reading shown on the balance.
reading ...................................................... kg [4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

5
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas.
gas supply
glass tube
liquid 50 mm
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the name of the device. .......................................................................................[1]
(ii) The pressure of the gas is 400 Pa greater than atmospheric pressure.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) With the gas supply connected, the top of the tube on the left of the device is sealed
securely with a rubber stopper. The gas pressure is then increased.
State and explain what happens to the liquid in the device.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 (a) The velocity of an object of mass m increases from u to v.
State, in terms of m, u and v, the change of momentum of the object.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In a game of tennis, a player hits a stationary ball with his racquet.
(i) The racquet is in contact with the ball for 6.0 ms. The average force on the ball during
this time is 400 N.
Calculate the impulse on the tennis ball.
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the ball is 0.056 kg.
Calculate the speed with which the ball leaves the racquet.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State the energy transfer that takes place:
1. as the ball changes shape during the contact between the racquet and the ball
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. as the ball leaves the racquet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

7
BLANK PAGE

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus used by a student to measure the specific heat capacity of iron.
thermometer
electric heater
iron block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The student improves the accuracy of the experiment by placing material around the block,
as shown in Fig. 4.2.
material
Fig. 4.2
(i) Suggest the name of a possible material the student could use and explain how it
improves the accuracy of the experiment.
suggestion .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

9
(ii) State how the student could further improve the accuracy of the experiment by using
more of the material used in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The current in the heater is 3.8 A and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 12 V. The iron
block has a mass of 2.0 kg. When the heater is switched on for 10 minutes, the temperature
of the block rises from 25 °C to 55 °C.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of iron.
specific heat capacity = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 8]

10
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a visible spectrum focused on a screen by passing light from a source of white
light through a lens and a prism.
glass
screen
prism
glass
lens
A
visible spectrum
B
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the name of the process that separates the colours in white light.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the colour of the light on the screen at:
point A ........................................
point B ........................................
[1]
(iii) State the property of the glass of the prism that causes white light to be split into the
different colours of the spectrum.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

11
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section of an optical fibre in air. A ray of light is incident on the fibre wall at X.
X
optical fibre
ray of
light
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2, continue the path of the ray of light up to the end of the fibre. [1]
(ii) The refractive index of the material of the fibre is 1.46. Calculate the critical angle of the
material of the fibre.
critical angle = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State two uses of optical fibres.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 represents a sound wave of wavelength 0.45 m travelling from left to right.
(a) On Fig. 6.1:
(i) at the centre of a compression, mark a cross and label it C [1]
(ii) at the centre of a rarefaction, mark a cross and label it R [1]
(iii) draw a double-headed arrow to represent a distance of 0.90 m. [1]
(b) The frequency of the wave is 750 Hz.
Calculate the speed of the wave.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest a medium through which the sound wave is travelling and state your reasoning.
medium ..............................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(d) Another type of wave that consists of compressions and rarefactions is ultrasound.
(i) State one other similarity between sound of frequency 750 Hz and ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State one way in which sound of frequency 750 Hz is different from ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

13
BLANK PAGE

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows three identical lamps and an ammeter connected to a power supply.
power
supply
Fig. 7.1
The switches are closed. Each lamp is rated at 60 W and operates at its normal working voltage of
110 V.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the current in each lamp
current = ............................................................[2]
(ii) the current in the ammeter
current = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the voltage of the power supply.
voltage = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

15
(b) (i) Calculate the resistance of the filament of one of the lamps when working normally.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Another lamp X has a filament with twice the resistance of each lamp in the circuit of
Fig. 7.1. The material and the temperature of the filament in lamp X is the same as the
filaments in the lamps in Fig. 7.1.
In Table 7.1, tick any box in the right-hand column that shows a possible difference
between the filament of lamp X and a filament of one of the lamps in the circuit.
Table 7.1
X has half the length

X has twice the length
X has one quarter the area of cross-section
X has half the area of cross-section
X has two times the area of cross-section
X has four times the area of cross-section
[2]
[Total: 8]

16
8 (a) (i) Fig. 8.1 shows a positively charged cube of insulating material. The cube is fixed to a
piece of wood that is floating on water. A negatively charged rod is held above the piece
of wood and brought close to the cube, as shown.
positively charged cube

of insulating material
negatively charged rod
+ – –
+ –
+
piece of wood
floating on water
Fig. 8.1
State and explain any movement of the piece of wood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Fig. 8.2 shows two cubes of insulating material. One is positively charged and the other
is negatively charged. The cubes are fixed to a piece of wood that is floating on water.
Charged rods are held above the piece of wood and brought close to the cubes, as
shown.
negatively charged cube negatively charged rod

of insulating material
– –
–
+ positively charged cube
– +
– + of insulating material
–
+ +
piece of wood
floating on water
positively charged rod
Fig. 8.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

17
State and explain any movement of the piece of wood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In terms of a simple electron model, describe the differences between conductors and
insulators.
conductors ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
insulators ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) On Fig. 8.3, draw the electric field pattern around a single point positive charge.
Fig. 8.3
[1]
[Total: 7]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a permanent bar magnet next to a circuit that contains a coil and a galvanometer.
N S
Fig. 9.1
(a) Suggest a metal from which the magnet is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The magnet is moved to the left and inserted a small distance into the coil. The galvanometer
deflects briefly and shows that there is a current in the coil.
(i) Explain why there is a current in the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the magnet is moving near to the coil, end Q of the coil behaves as a magnetic pole.
State the polarity of end Q and explain why it has this polarity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Suggest two ways in which the deflection of the galvanometer can be reversed.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

19
10 (a) A detector of ionising radiation measures the background count rate in a classroom where
there are no radioactive samples present.
The readings, in counts/minute, taken over a period of time are shown in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1
counts / minute 16 12 14 16 15 17
(i) State two possible sources of this background radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the readings are not the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) With no radioactive sample present, a scientist records a background radiation count of
40 counts / minute.
He brings a radioactive sample close to the detector. The count rate increases to
200 counts / minute.
After 24 days the count rate is 50 counts / minute.
Calculate the half-life of the radioactive sample.
half-life = ...........................................................[4]

20
(c) Draw a line between each type of ionising radiation and its property and another line between
the property and its use. One has been done for you.
Name of Property Use

ionising
radiation
It is the most
ionising radiation
Remotely detecting
and is most easily
X-ray leaks in underground
absorbed by very
water pipes
small amounts of
substance
Penetration is
affected by small
Detecting fractures in
α-particle changes in the
bones
amount of solid it is
passing through
It is highly
Detecting smoke in a
β-particle penetrating and is
fire alarm system
poorly ionising
Can pass easily

Detecting a change in
through soft living
the thickness of
γ-ray tissue. Calcium
aluminium foil during
absorbs more than
its manufacture
soft tissue
[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

* 8 1 9 2 3 7 7 3 5 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151945/4
2
1 A train of mass 5.6 × 105 kg is at rest in a station.
At time t = 0 s, a resultant force acts on the train and it starts to accelerate forwards.
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the train for the first 120 s.
5000
distance / m
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Use Fig. 1.1 to determine:
1. the average speed of the train during the 120 s
average speed = ...........................................................[1]
2. the speed of the train at time t = 100 s.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

3
(ii) Describe how the acceleration of the train at time t = 100 s differs from the acceleration
at time t = 20 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) The initial acceleration of the train is 0.75 m / s2.
Calculate the resultant force that acts on the train at this time.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) At time t = 120 s, the train begins to decelerate.
State what is meant by deceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform plank AB of length 2.0 m suspended from two ropes X and Y.
P Q
1.5 m
rope X rope Y
A B
0.5 m
W = 210 N
Fig. 2.1
The weight W of the plank is 210 N. The force in rope X is P. The force in rope Y is Q.
(a) State, in terms of P, the moment of force P about B.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate:
(i) the moment of W about B
moment = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the force P
force P = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the force Q.
force Q = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

5
3 (a) State what is meant by the principle of conservation of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a girl throwing a heavy ball.
ball
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the energy changes that take place from when the girl begins to exert a force on
the ball until the ball hits the ground and stops moving.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the ball is 4.0 kg. The girl exerts a force on the ball for 0.60 s. The speed of
the ball increases from 0 m / s to 12 m / s before it leaves the girl’s hand.
Calculate:
1. the momentum of the ball on leaving the girl’s hand
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force exerted on the ball.
average resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows liquid in a cylinder.
cylinder
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The depth of the liquid is 10 cm and the radius of the cylinder is 3.0 cm. The weight of the
liquid in the cylinder is 2.5 N.
density = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas supply.
gas supply
liquid
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the name of the device. .......................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

7
(ii) The difference h between the two liquid levels is 2.0 cm. The density of the liquid is
800 kg / m3.
Calculate the difference between the pressure of the gas and atmospheric pressure.
pressure difference = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) A similar device with a tube of smaller cross-sectional area is connected to a gas supply
at the same pressure.
State and explain any effect on the value of h.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

8
5 (a) (i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the structure of a thermocouple
thermometer. Include the device from which a reading is taken.
[3]
(ii) A thermocouple thermometer is used to measure the temperature of the flame of a small
candle.
State two reasons why the thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this application.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State and explain any effect on the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer of:
(i) reducing the diameter of the capillary tube
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) increasing the volume of the liquid-filled bulb.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

9
6 (a) State three factors that determine the rate of evaporation of water.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A person climbs out of a swimming pool and stands in the open air.
Explain why evaporation of water from the surface of the person’s body causes the person to
feel cold.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

10
7 (a) A laser produces a beam of monochromatic light. State what is meant by the term
monochromatic.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A wave, in air, is incident on a glass block. Fig. 7.1 shows the wavefronts at the air-glass
boundary. The arrow shows the direction of travel of the wavefronts.
direction of
travel of
wavefronts
air
glass
Fig. 7.1
The wave undergoes reflection and refraction at the air-glass boundary.
On Fig. 7.1 draw:
(i) the wavefronts of the reflected wave [3]
(ii) the wavefronts of the refracted wave. [3]
(c) A transverse wave is produced in a long, horizontal rope. The rope is much longer than the
wavelength of the wave.
In the space below, sketch a diagram to show the appearance of the rope as the wave passes
along it. Label two important features of the wave.
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18
11
8 A vibrating source on a ship produces a sound wave that travels through the ocean. The wave
produced is a longitudinal wave.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term longitudinal wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The frequency of the sound wave is 800 Hz.
(i) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
State a typical value for the speed of sound in a liquid.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Using your value from (b)(i), calculate the wavelength of the sound wave in the ocean.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the symbol for a 12 V battery.
12 V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Two lamps are connected in parallel with the battery. On Fig. 9.1, using the correct symbols,
complete the circuit diagram. [1]
(b) One of these lamps has a resistance of 6.0 Ω.
Calculate, for this lamp:
(i) the current
current = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the power.
power = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The power of the other lamp is 36 W.
Calculate the total energy delivered to this lamp in 20 hours.
energy = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

13
10 A transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a metal core. Fig. 10.1 represents the
transformer.
core
primary coil secondary coil
Fig. 10.1
(a) State the name of the metal from which the core is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The primary coil of the transformer is connected to the output voltage of an a.c. generator
which supplies an alternating current.
(i) Explain why there is a voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) There are 560 turns on the primary coil and 910 turns on the secondary coil of the
transformer. The voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil is 78 V.
Calculate the voltage supplied by the a.c. generator.
generator voltage = ............................................................[2]
(c) Transformers are used to increase the voltage when electrical energy is transmitted in cables
across long distances.
Explain why power losses in the cables are lower when the voltage is high.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows data about nine elements.
proton number element symbol

2 helium He
3 lithium Li
4 beryllium Be
5 boron B
6 carbon C
7 nitrogen N
8 oxygen O
9 fluorine F
10 neon Ne
Fig. 11.1
Carbon-14 is a radioactive isotope with a nucleon number of 14. It decays by emitting

β-particles.
Use any data you need from Fig. 11.1 to write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

15
(b) A radioactive sample is placed close to a detector. The radioactive isotope in the sample has
a long half-life. The detector records a count rate of 597 counts / s.
Fig. 11.2 shows the readings when different materials are placed between the radioactive
sample and the detector.
count rate
material
counts / s
a sheet of paper 602
a piece of thin aluminium 598
a piece of thin lead 510
Fig. 11.2
Explain whether any α-particles, β-particles or γ-rays are emitted by the radioactive sample.
α-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
β-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
γ-rays ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

Cambridge Assessment International Education
* 6 0 9 2 5 3 1 2 4 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (ST/CT) 167383/5
2
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the distance-time graph for the journey of a cyclist.
350
300
distance / m
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) Describe the motion of the cyclist in the time between:
1. time = 0 and time = 15 s
...........................................................................................................................................
2. time = 15 s and time = 30 s
...........................................................................................................................................
3. time = 30 s and time = 40 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Calculate, for the 40 s journey:
1. the average speed
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
2. the maximum speed.
maximum speed = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19
3
2 (a) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using a wind turbine as a source of electrical
energy.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a wind turbine.
wind speed
16 m / s
area swept out by

the turbine blades
Fig. 2.1
(i) The wind blows at a speed of 16 m / s towards the turbine blades. In one second, a
volume of 24 000 m3 of air passes through the circular area swept out by the blades. The
density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.
Calculate:
1. the mass of air that passes through the circular area swept out by the blades in 1.0 s
mass = ......................................................... [2]
2. the kinetic energy of the mass of air that passes through the area swept out by the
blades.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why some of the kinetic energy of the air that passes through the circular area
swept out by the blades is not converted into electrical energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
4
3 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed.
State three ways in which a force may change the motion of the object.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
3 ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows an object suspended from two ropes. The weight of the object is 360 N. The
magnitude of the tension in each rope is T.
T T
45° 45°
object
360 N
Fig. 3.1
In the space below, determine the tension T by drawing a vector diagram of the forces acting
on the object.
State the scale you have used.
scale ...............................................................
T = ...............................................................
[5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19
5
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a mercury barometer. The tube containing the mercury is vertical.
mercury
Fig. 4.1
(i) The height h indicates a value of the atmospheric pressure.
State what is contained in the space labelled S.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On a particular day the atmospheric pressure is 1.02 × 105 Pa. The density of mercury
is 13 600 kg / m3.
Calculate the value of h indicated by the barometer.
h = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) The tube containing mercury is now tilted so that it makes an angle of 10° with the
vertical. After tilting, there continues to be a space above the mercury in the tube.
State and explain whether the vertical height of mercury in the tube is smaller, the same,
or greater than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Another mercury barometer in the same room at the same time shows a lower value of h than
the barometer in (a).
Suggest and explain a reason for the lower value.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
6
5 (a) State the values of the fixed points of a temperature scale.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) The graduations on a liquid-in-glass thermometer are equally spaced.
For the equal spacing of the graduations to be correct, state:
1. an assumption that is made about the liquid in the thermometer
...........................................................................................................................................
2. an assumption that is made about the structure of the thermometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Liquid-in-glass thermometer A has a greater range than liquid-in-glass thermometer B.
State one way the design of thermometer A is different from thermometer B.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Liquid-in-glass thermometer C has a greater sensitivity than liquid-in-glass thermometer D.
State one way the design of thermometer C is different from thermometer D.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

7
(c) (i) In the space provided, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple thermometer.
[3]
(ii) Suggest when a thermocouple thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-in-glass

thermometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

8
6 An electrical heater is placed on the floor of a room in a house. The heater is switched on.
(a) State the main process by which thermal energy is transferred to the air in all parts of the
room.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The heater has a power of 1.5 kW. The air in the room has a mass of 65 kg. The specific heat
capacity of air is 720 J / (kg °C).
(i) Calculate the time it takes for this heater to raise the temperature of the air in the room
from 8.0 °C to 15.0 °C.
time = ......................................................... [4]
(ii) State two reasons why the time calculated in (b)(i) is smaller than the actual time taken
to raise the temperature of the air in the room from 8.0 °C to 15.0 °C.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

9
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, the small circles represent molecules. The arrows refer to the change of state
from the arrangement of molecules on the left to the arrangement of molecules on the right.
Fig. 7.1
Complete the following by writing solid, liquid or gas in each of the blank spaces.
1. Change of state X is from ............................................ to ............................................ .
2. Change of state Y is from ............................................ to ............................................ .

[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces between their molecules, why gases expand more than solids
when they undergo the same rise in temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A cylinder of volume 0.012 m3 contains a compressed gas at a pressure of 1.8 × 106 Pa.
A valve is opened and all the compressed gas escapes from the cylinder into the atmosphere.
The temperature of the gas does not change.
Calculate the volume that the escaped gas occupies at the atmospheric pressure
of 1.0 × 105 Pa.
volume = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]
10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in ice. The wavefronts are incident on a boundary
with air.
direction
of wave
ice
air
Fig. 8.1
The speed of the light wave in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s. The refractive index of the ice is 1.3.
(a) On Fig. 8.1:
(i) draw the wavefronts of the wave that passes into the air [3]
(ii) draw arrows to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave [1]
(iii) label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r. [1]
(b) Calculate the speed of the light wave in the ice.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

11
BLANK PAGE

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference (p.d.) graphs for a resistor and for a thermistor.
6.0
current / A
4.0
resistor
2.0 thermistor
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the resistance of the thermistor when the p.d. across it is 7.0 V.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(b) In Table 9.1, tick the boxes that indicate the effect on the resistances of the resistor and of the
thermistor when the p.d. across them is increased from 0 to 7.0 V.
Table 9.1
component resistance increases resistance is constant resistance decreases

resistor
thermistor
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

13
(c) The thermistor and the resistor are connected in parallel to a 7.0 V supply.
Calculate:
(i) the current from the supply
current = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the energy transferred from the supply in 5.0 minutes.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) The electrical energy produced by a power station is transmitted over long distances at a very
high voltage.
Explain why a very high voltage is used.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 10.1 represents a transformer.
core
4000
120 V P turns S 9.0 V
Fig. 10.1
(i) The primary coil P has 4000 turns and an input of 120 V. The secondary coil S has an
output of 9.0 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) State a suitable material for the core of the transformer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

15
11 (a) (i) One isotope of iridium-194 is represented by

194
Ir
77
This isotope decays by β-emission to a stable isotope of platinum (Pt).
Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
194 ...... ......

Ir Pt + β
77 ...... ...... [3]
(ii) The half-life of iridium-194 is 19 hours. A sample of iridium-194 has an initial count-rate
of 1100 counts / min.
Calculate the count-rate from this sample after 38 hours.
count-rate = ......................................................... [2]
(b) State two ways in which γ-emission differs from β-emission.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

16
BLANK PAGE
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

* 0 3 3 3 4 7 9 9 2 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (PQ/SG) 174869/4
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the top view of a tank in an aquarium. The tank is filled with salt water.
1.6 m
1.1 m
1.0 m
3.2 m
The depth of the water in the tank is 2.0 m.
(a) Calculate the volume of the water in the tank.
volume = ........................................................ [3]
(b) The density of the water in the tank is 1.1 × 103 kg / m3.
Calculate the mass of the water in the tank.
mass = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

3
(c) Calculate the pressure due to the water at a level of 0.80 m above the base of the tank.
pressure = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) (i) State, in words, the equation that defines the moment of a force.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what is meant by the moment of a force.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Force is a vector quantity.
Explain what is meant by the term vector.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a tower crane used to lift a load on a construction site.
counterweight
load
Fig. 2.1
Explain how the counterweight prevents the crane from toppling over.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

5
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows a waterfall.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Describe the main energy transfer which is taking place as the water falls.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The speed of the water as it hits the bottom is 21 m / s.
Calculate the height h of the waterfall.
height = ........................................................ [3]
(iii) State and explain any assumption you made in (ii).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The Sun is the source of energy for most energy resources used to produce electricity.
State two energy resources that have another source for their energy.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Solids have a fixed shape. Liquids adapt to the shape of their container. Gases fill their container.
Explain in terms of forces between molecules and arrangement of molecules, why solids, liquids
and gases have these properties.
Solids ...............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Liquids ..............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Gases ...............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
[6]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

7
5 An electric kettle contains water at a temperature of 19 °C. The kettle has a power rating of 3.0 kW
and is switched on for 3.5 minutes.
(a) Calculate the energy supplied to the kettle by the electricity supply.
electrical energy = ........................................................ [3]
(b) At 3.5 minutes, the temperature of the water reaches 100 °C. The volume of the water in
the kettle is 1700 cm3 and its density is 1.0 g / cm3. The specific heat capacity of water is
4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water.
thermal energy = ........................................................ [5]
(c) Calculate the efficiency of the kettle.
efficiency = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a sound wave travelling in air from left to right.
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the name given to the:
(i) region around A in the diagram ............................................................... [1]
(ii) region around B in the diagram. ............................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw a double-headed arrow to show one wavelength. [1]
(c) The loudness of the sound increases at the same pitch.
State and explain any change there would be in the pattern of wavefronts shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) The wave passes into water.
State and explain any change in the pattern of wavefronts shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows the position of a converging lens, its principal axis and an object O.
principal
axis
F O F
lens
Fig. 7.1
Each principal focus of the lens is labelled F.
On Fig. 7.1, draw a ray diagram to locate the position of the image formed by the lens.
Label the image I. [3]
(b) Describe the nature of the image I.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Images formed by lenses sometimes have coloured edges.
Suggest a reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

10
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a negatively charged conducting sphere.
− −
− −
− −
− −
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw the electric field pattern around the sphere. [2]
(b) The current in an electrical device is 0.21 A.
Calculate the charge that flows during a 75 s period of time.
charge = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

11
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit containing an LED and two resistors in parallel, each of resistance R.
R R
3.7 V
Fig. 9.1
The normal operating voltage of the LED is 2.1 V and the normal current is 0.19 A.
(a) (i) The potential difference (p.d.) across the LED is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(ii) The current in the LED is measured with an ammeter.
On Fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this ammeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(b) Calculate the value of R when the LED is operating normally.
R = ........................................................ [5]
[Total: 7]

12
10 (a) A magnet and a coil are attached separately to a door and a door frame as shown in
Fig. 10.1.
The purpose of the arrangement is to activate a circuit connected to an LED indicator when
the door is opening or closing. This will provide a visual indication that the door is being used.
indicator
coil
magnet
S
door frame
door
Fig. 10.1
Initially, the door is closed and then it is opened.
(i) Explain why the indicator comes on and then goes off when the door is opened.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The door shuts. The indicator comes on more brightly but for a shorter time than it
did in (i). Suggest and explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

13
(b) A circuit breaker is recommended for use with an electric lawnmower.
State two reasons for this recommendation.
reason 1 .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
reason 2 .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

14
11 (a) The circles shown in Fig. 11.1 represent three gold nuclei. Three α-particles are approaching
the gold nuclei.
α-particle
α-particle
α-particle
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, complete the path of each α-particle. [3]
(b) A detector of radioactivity in a laboratory indicates an average of 16 counts / min when no

radioactive samples are present. A radioactive sample of half-life 1.5 days is placed close to
the detector, which indicates a count rate of 208 counts / min.
Calculate the count rate that is indicated 6 days later.
count rate = ...................................... counts / min [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

15
(c) The waste from nuclear power stations includes the isotopes technetium-99, tin-126 and
selenium-79. These isotopes are radioactive with half-lives of many thousands of years.
State three economic and environmental consequences of producing this waste.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

* 6 5 2 4 3 9 4 7 5 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/CB) 174868/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the top view of a rectangular paddling pool of constant depth. The pool is filled with
sea water.
44.0 m
20.0 m
(a) The volume of the sea water in the pool is 264 m3.
Calculate the depth of the pool.
depth = ........................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

3
(b) The mass of the sea water in the pool is 2.70 × 105 kg.
Calculate the density of the sea water. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
density = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the pressure due to the sea water at the bottom of the pool.
pressure = ........................................................ [2]
(d) State a suitable instrument for measuring the dimensions given in Fig. 1.1.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) State the two conditions which must be true for an object to be in equilibrium.
condition 1 ................................................................................................................................
condition 2 ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform metre rule PQ in equilibrium.
10 cm 40 cm
P Q
pivot
0.50 N
Fig. 2.1
The distance PQ is 100 cm. The mass of the metre rule is 0.12 kg and its weight is W.
(i) On Fig 2.1, draw and label:
1. an arrow to show the force W acting on PQ at the centre of mass
2. an arrow to show the force R acting on PQ at the pivot.

[2]
(ii) By taking moments about the pivot, calculate F.
F = ........................................................ [4]
(iii) Calculate R.
R = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a gas contained in a cylinder enclosed by a piston.
pressure gauge
piston
cylinder
gas
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe, in terms of momentum of the molecules, how a pressure is exerted on the walls of
the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The piston is pushed into the cylinder. The volume decreases from 820 cm3 to 330 cm3 . The
pressure gauge measures the pressure after compression as 20 000 Pa. The temperature
remains constant.
Calculate the value of the pressure before the gas was compressed.
pressure = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 6]

6
4 (a) A student carries out an experiment to determine the thermal capacity of a metal block. The
block is heated by an electric heater for 23 minutes. The current in the heater is 3.0 A at a
potential difference (p.d.) of 12 V.
The temperature of the block rises from 20 °C to 70 °C.
Calculate the thermal capacity of the block.
thermal capacity = ........................................................ [4]
(b) 1. Two metal spheres of different diameters are heated to 900 °C in a hot oven. The two
spheres are removed from the oven.
State and explain any difference in the initial rates of emission of radiation of thermal energy
between the two spheres.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. One hot sphere is now heated in a hotter oven.
State and explain any effect on the rate of emission of radiation of thermal energy from that
sphere when it is removed from the hotter oven.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

7
5 (a) One difference between a longitudinal wave and a transverse wave is that a longitudinal
wave consists of compressions and rarefactions.
(i) Explain the terms compression and rarefaction using ideas about particles.
compression ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe one other way in which longitudinal wave motion differs from transverse wave
motion.
Longitudinal wave motion ..................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Transverse wave motion ...................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) A sound wave of frequency 0.120 kHz travels through a rock at a speed of 3500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave.
wavelength = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) The wave travels from the rock into the air.
State and explain whether the wave will be audible to a healthy human ear.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows an empty container and an observer’s eye. There is a small coin at position O.
The observer is unable to see the coin.
eye
Fig. 6.1
The observer and the coin stay in the same position and the container is filled with water. The
observer can now see the coin.
(i) Explain why the coin can be seen by the observer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of the wave process which occurs as the light passes from the water into
the air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the image of the coin is a virtual image.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the speed of light in air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The refractive index of water is 1.3.
Calculate the speed of light in water.
speed of light in water = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a coil of wire wound on a thin plastic cylinder. The plastic has no effect on any
magnetic field. The galvanometer is extremely sensitive.
magnet
coil of wire
S N B
A
small trolley
plastic cylinder
Fig. 7.1
A magnet is fixed to a small trolley that runs without friction on a track through the cylinder
and coil.
(i) The trolley is released from point A so it runs through the coil from right to left.
State and explain what is observed on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The trolley is now released from point B so it runs through the coil from right to left again.
State what is observed on the galvanometer and explain why it is different to your answer
in (a)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows an extension lead used to supply power to a 3 kW electric heater on a cool
evening.
damp grass
3 kW electric
heater
cut in outer
insulation
plug and socket

lying on grass
paved area
extension lead designed
for use with a 25 W lamp
Fig. 7.2
State and explain three dangers with this arrangement.
danger 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
danger 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
danger 3 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

11
8 (a) A wire of length 2.0 m and cross-sectional area 0.40 mm2 has a resistance of 0.14 Ω.
Calculate the resistance of another wire of the same material of length 3.0 m and
cross-sectional area 0.90 mm2.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [4]
(b) A student is designing a digital electronic circuit. Fig. 8.1 shows her partly completed design.
A C
B D
Fig. 8.1
(i) Table 8.1 is a truth table.

Complete the columns in this truth table to show the values for input B in the circuit.
Table 8.1
Input A Input B Point C Point D Output O

1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
[2]
(ii) The column O in the truth table shows the desired output values for the circuit.
On Fig. 8.1, complete the circuit to achieve these output values. Label any gate used. [2]
[Total: 8]

12
9 (a) Describe what is meant by the term electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows two parallel conducting plates connected to a battery.
conducting plate
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, draw five lines to show the electric field pattern between the two plates. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

13
(c) When fully charged, a 1.2 V rechargeable battery can deliver a current of 210 mA for 10 hours.
(i) Calculate the charge that can be delivered by the fully charged battery.
charge = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) Calculate the energy stored in the battery when fully charged.
energy stored = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) State the type of energy stored when the battery is charged.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) The nucleus of a hydrogen atom is a proton. The mass of a proton is m and the size of the
charge on a proton is e.
Complete Table 10.1. Express your answers in terms of m and e. Three spaces have already
been completed.
Table 10.1
particle or emission mass charge

proton m e
neutron m
γ-ray
nucleus of helium-4
( 42He)
[4]
(b) Many schools and colleges use radioactive isotopes for teaching and research. Describe how
these radioactive isotopes are handled, used and stored in a safe way.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

* 0 4 3 1 9 9 1 6 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/CGW) 174867/3
2
1 A car accelerates from rest at time t = 0 to its maximum speed.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the first 25 s of its motion.
40
speed
m/s
30
20
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The mass of the car is 2300 kg.
For the time between t = 0 and t = 5.0 s, determine:
(i) the acceleration of the car
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the car.
resultant force = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

3
(b) Describe the motion of the car between t = 10 s and t = 15 s. Explain how Fig. 1.1 shows this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Between t = 10 s and t = 15 s, the force exerted on the car due to the engine remains constant.
Suggest and explain why the car moves in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 (a) State two properties of an object that may be changed by the action of forces.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A chest expander is a piece of equipment used by athletes in a gym. Fig. 2.1 shows a chest
expander that consists of five identical springs connected in parallel between two handles.
springs
Fig. 2.1
Each spring has an unstretched length of 0.63 m.
Two athletes are stretching the chest expander by pulling on the two handles in opposite
directions.
(i) The springs obey Hooke’s law.
Explain what is meant by this statement.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Each athlete pulls the handle towards himself with a force of 1300 N.
1. State the tension in each spring.
tension = ........................................................ [1]
2. The chest expander stretches and each spring is now 0.94 m long.
Calculate the spring constant k of each spring.
k = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

5
(iii) State the energy changes taking place as the two athletes use their muscles to stretch
the chest expander.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a shooting competition, where air rifles fire soft metal pellets at distant targets.
target
air rifle
Fig. 3.1
When an air rifle is fired, it exerts an impulse of 0.019 N s on the pellet.
(a) Define impulse.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The pellet has a mass of 1.1 × 10–4 kg.
Determine:
(i) the speed with which the pellet leaves the rifle
speed = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the pellet as it leaves the rifle.
kinetic energy = ........................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

7
(c) The pellet melts when it strikes the target.
Describe how the molecular structure of the liquid metal differs from that of the solid metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a loudspeaker that is producing a sound wave in air of frequency 15 000 Hz.
hollow
paper
cone
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the cone of the loudspeaker produces this sound.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of this sound.
wavelength = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

9
(c) The loudspeaker is placed a considerable distance to the left of a barrier with a gap. The
width of the gap is double the wavelength of the sound. Sound from the loudspeaker reaches
the barrier and passes through the gap.
Fig. 4.2 shows the gap in the barrier.
barrier
barrier
On Fig. 4.2, sketch a diagram that represents the sound wave as a series of wavefronts
• travelling towards the barrier
• in the gap
• and travelling away from the barrier.

[3]
[Total: 8]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a sphere that is negatively charged. The sphere is attached to a plastic stand.
plastic stand
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw arrows to indicate the pattern and direction of the electric field in the region
surrounding the sphere. [2]
(b) A smaller, uncharged metal sphere S is suspended by a plastic thread and brought close to
the negatively charged sphere. Fig. 5.2 shows the two spheres.
plastic thread
Fig. 5.2
(i) By drawing on Fig. 5.2, indicate the distribution of charge on S. [2]
(ii) State what happens to S.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) An earth wire is then touched against S.
Describe what happens in the wire and state how this affects the charge on S.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

11
(c) The metal sphere S is an electrical conductor. The plastic thread is an electrical insulator.
Explain this difference by referring to the structures of the two materials.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a shower that takes in cold water. The water passes through an electric water
heater and emerges from the showerhead at a higher temperature.
showerhead
electric
water heater
Fig. 6.1
The power of the heater is 9000 W.
(a) The shower is powered by a 230 V electricity supply.
(i) Calculate the current in the heater when it is switched on.
current = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) Suggest a suitable rating for the fuse in the heater circuit.
fuse rating = ........................................................ [1]
(b) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C). The initial temperature of the cold water
is 16 °C.
Determine the maximum mass of water that can be heated to a temperature of 35 °C in 1.0 s.
mass = ........................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

13
(c) A safety control in the shower switches off the shower when the water becomes dangerously
hot. The control uses a thermocouple thermometer to measure the temperature of the heated
water.
(i) Describe the structure of a thermocouple thermometer. Include a diagram in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why a thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this purpose.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

14
7 The resistance of a 1.0 m length of resistance wire is 7.6 Ω. A length of this wire is taped to a metre
rule. A crocodile clip is connected to one end of the resistance wire exactly at the 0 m mark of the
rule. Fig. 7.1 shows the crocodile clip connected to terminal P.
0 m mark movable contact metre rule

l
1.0 m mark
crocodile clip
resistance wire
connecting wire
terminal P terminal Q
Fig. 7.1
A second terminal Q is connected to a movable contact using a long length of connecting wire.
The movable contact is in contact with the resistance wire at a length l from the 0 m mark on the
rule.
The movable contact is placed at different points on the resistance wire. The resistance R of the
length l of the wire depends on l.
(a) On Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show how R varies with l for values of l between l = 0 and
l = 1.0 m. Mark appropriate values on the axes of the graph.
R/Ω
0
0 l/m
Fig. 7.2
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

15
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V connected across the 1.0 m length
of the resistance wire.
12 V
l
movable contact metre rule
resistance wire
terminal P terminal Q
Fig. 7.3
(i) State what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate:
1. the current in the resistance wire
current = ........................................................ [2]
2. the potential difference (p.d.) between terminal P and terminal Q when l = 0.35 m
p.d. = ........................................................ [1]
3. the charge that passes through the resistance wire in 5.5 minutes.
charge = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 9]

16
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a ray of red light incident on one side of a glass prism in air.
glass prism
red light
Fig. 8.1
For red light, the refractive index of glass is nR.
(a) The angle of incidence is 53° and the angle of refraction in the glass is 30°.
(i) Calculate nR.
nR = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the red light when it emerges from the
glass prism. Label this path R. [1]
(iii) Explain why the quantity refractive index does not have a unit.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For violet light, the refractive index nV of glass is slightly larger than nR.
(i) A ray of violet light is incident on the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.
On Fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the violet light in the prism and when it
emerges into the air. Label this path V. [1]
(ii) When a ray of white light is incident on the prism, dispersion produces a continuous
spectrum of coloured light.
State how the speed of light in glass depends on its frequency. Explain how this is shown
by the dispersion of white light in the prism.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19
17
BLANK PAGE

18
9 (a) The chemical symbol of the element lithium is Li. The proton number of lithium is 3.
Fig. 9.1 is a representation of a nucleus of a radioactive isotope of lithium that is about to

decay.
Fig. 9.1
(i) Write down, using nuclide notation, the symbol that represents this isotope of lithium.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) This isotope of lithium decays by β-particle emission to form another nucleus.
Complete Fig. 9.2 to represent this decay by:
• using the same representation as in Fig. 9.1 and in the space after the arrow, draw
a diagram of the nucleus formed by the decay
• writing the name of the particle that is identical to a β-particle on the answer line
provided.
+
.............................................
Fig. 9.2
[3]
(b) A radiation detector is set up in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples.
On six separate occasions, the detector is switched on for 1.0 minute and the background
count is recorded. The counts are:
23 27 25 24 20 25
(i) State why the readings are not all identical.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a possible source for this background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

19
(iii) A sample containing only one radioactive isotope is brought into the laboratory. The
half-life of the isotope is 15 hours.
The sample is placed near to the radiation detector in this laboratory. The detector is
switched on and, after 1.0 minute, a count of 440 is recorded.
The sample is left next to the detector and the experiment is repeated 45 hours later.
The detector is switched on for 1.0 minute.
Predict the reading for the count obtained on this occasion.
reading ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 5 5 3 4 5 9 9 9 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (JC/JG) 187443/4
2
1 A rocket is launched vertically upwards from the ground. The rocket travels with uniform
acceleration from rest. After 8.0 s, the speed of the rocket is 120 m / s.
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the rocket.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(b) (i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for the motion of the rocket in the first 8.0 s.
200
speed
m/s
150
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[1]
(ii) Use the graph to determine the height of the rocket at 8.0 s.
height = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) From time = 8.0 s to time = 20.0 s, the rocket rises with increasing speed but with
decreasing acceleration.
From time = 20.0 s to time = 25.0 s, the rocket has a constant speed of less than 200 m / s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for this motion. [3]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an athlete crossing the finishing line in a race. As she crosses the finishing line, her
speed is 10.0 m / s. She slows down to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the athlete is 71 kg. Calculate the impulse applied to her as she slows down.
impulse = ........................................................ [3]
(b) (i) Define impulse in terms of force and time.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The athlete takes 1.2 s to slow down from a speed of 10.0 m / s to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the athlete as she slows down.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the force required to give a mass of 71 kg an acceleration of 6.4 m / s2.
force = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a model of a wind turbine used to demonstrate the use of wind energy to generate
electricity. The wind is blowing towards the model, as shown.
turbine blades
circular area swept out

by turbine blades
wind
A
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades each
second is 7.5 kg. The kinetic energy of the air that passes through this circular area each
second is 240 J.
(i) Calculate the speed of the air.
speed = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) The kinetic energy of the air drives a generator. State the input power of the air passing
through the turbine blades.
input power = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

5
(b) The output current of the generator is 2.0 A. The output potential difference (p.d.) of the
generator is 11 V.
(i) Calculate the output power of the generator.
output power = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the efficiency of the wind turbine.
efficiency = .................................................... % [2]
(c) The density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.

Calculate the volume of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades
each second.
volume = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

6
4 (a) Define the specific latent heat of fusion of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to 0.35 kg of water. The initial temperature of the water is
24.5 °C. The temperature of the water decreases to 0 °C. The water loses 35 000 J of thermal
energy as it cools. All of the ice added to the water melts.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate:
(i) the specific heat capacity of water
specific heat capacity = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the mass of ice added to the water.
mass = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

7
5 (a) Complete the sentences with words that describe the main process of thermal energy transfer
in each case.
A man goes for a walk on a cold day. He touches a metal gate, which removes thermal
energy from his hands by ................................. . He holds the sides of a cup containing a
hot drink. His hands gain thermal energy by ................................. . Some farm workers have
lit a fire. The man warms his hands by the side of the fire. His hands gain thermal energy by
................................. . [3]
(b) Describe in terms of particles the transfer of thermal energy through the metal of the gate
after transfer from the man’s hands.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a car on a sunny day in a hot country.
windscreen
object A
Fig. 5.1
The object labelled A is placed inside the windscreen. It is used by the owner of the car to
reduce the temperature rise of the air in the car.
Ring the most suitable material for the outer surface of object A. Explain your choice.
dull black dull white shiny black shiny white
explanation ................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a water wave moving from left to right in a harbour.
crest of wave
harbour wall
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw three more crests to the right of point A. [2]
(ii) State the name of the wave process that occurs as the wave passes point A.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the crests of another wave moving from left to right in a different part of the
harbour. This wave moves from deep water to shallow water.
deep water shallow water
crest of wave
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of movement of the wave after it has
passed into the shallow water. [1]
(ii) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes into the shallow water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

9
(iii) Complete Table 6.1 to state whether each of the properties of the wave increases,
decreases or stays the same as the wave passes into the shallow water.
Table 6.1
property effect
wavelength
frequency
speed
[3]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and the image I formed when an object is placed to the left
of the lens. The principal focuses are labelled A and B and the centre of the lens is labelled C.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays to locate the position of the object.
Draw the object and label it O.
lens
A C B
I
Fig. 7.1
[3]
(ii) Ring all of the following distances that are equal to the focal length of the lens.
AB AC CB 2AB
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows green light passing through a triangular glass block.
Fig. 7.2
Red light enters the triangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.2 along the same path as the green
light.
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the red light within the triangular glass block. [1]
Fig. 7.3 shows green light passing through a rectangular glass block.
Red light enters the rectangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.3 along the same path as the
green light.
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3:
(ii) draw the path of the red light within the rectangular glass block [1]
(iii) draw the path of the red light after leaving the rectangular glass block. [1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
A 3.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
X Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.1
The lamp has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. Line XY represents a uniform resistance wire of resistance
6.0 Ω.
(a) Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

13
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows the circuit with a different connection to the resistance wire and an added
resistor. The length XY of the whole resistance wire is 2.0 m. The contact is made at Q where
the distance XQ is 0.60 m.
12 V
A 3.0 Ω
1.5 Ω 2.0 Ω
0.60 m
X Q Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.2
Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ........................................................ [4]
[Total: 6]

14
9 (a) State the name of the logic gate with the symbol shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.1
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the name of the logic gate with the truth table shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
input output
0 1
1 0
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
A C
E
B
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table in Table 9.2 for this circuit for all possible combinations of input.
Table 9.2
A B C D E
1 1
1 0
1 0
0 0
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

15
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is a simplified top view of a flat coil. There is an alternating current (a.c.) in the coil.
Fig. 10.1
Describe the magnetic effect of this alternating current.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a pan placed above the coil. The base of the pan is made of steel.
pan
coil
Fig. 10.2
State what quantity is induced in the base of the pan.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The pan contains water.
State and explain the effect of the quantity induced in part (b) on the temperature of the water
in the pan.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) The isotope hydrogen-1 has a proton number of 1 and a nucleon number of 1.
Two isotopes of helium are helium-3 and helium-4.
Helium-3 has a proton number of 2 and a nucleon number of 3.
Helium-4 has a nucleon number of 4.
Complete Table 11.1 for neutral atoms of these isotopes of helium.
Table 11.1
helium-3 helium-4
number of neutrons
number of electrons
mass compared to a neutral

atom of hydrogen-1
[3]
(b) An experiment takes place in a laboratory shielded from all background radiation. A sample
of radioactive material is wrapped in aluminium foil of thickness 0.1 mm. A detector of ionising
radiation placed 1 cm from the foil records a reading.
A piece of aluminium of thickness 5 mm is placed between the detector and the foil. The
detector reading drops to zero.
State and explain any type of radiation passing through the aluminium foil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 1 2 0 4 7 0 8 0 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194263/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph of a person on a journey.
On the journey, he walks and then waits for a bus. He then travels by bus. He gets off the bus and
waits for two minutes. He then walks again. His journey takes 74 minutes.
50
speed
km / h
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) For the whole journey calculate:
(i) the distance travelled
distance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) the average speed.
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

3
(b) State and explain which feature of a speed–time graph shows acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain the acceleration of the person at time = 40 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a train.
Fig. 2.1
The total mass of the train and its passengers is 750 000 kg. The train is travelling at a speed of
84 m / s. The driver applies the brakes and the train takes 80 s to slow down to a speed of 42 m / s.
(a) Calculate the impulse applied to the train as it slows down.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the average resultant force applied to the train as it slows down.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest how the shape of the train helps it to travel at high speeds.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The train took 80 s to reduce its speed from 84 m / s to 42 m / s. Explain why, with the same
braking force, the train takes more than 80 s to reduce its speed from 42 m / s to zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) On a wet day, the train travels a greater distance before it stops along the same track. The
train has the same speed of 84 m / s before the brakes are applied.
Suggest a reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20
5
3 (a) A solar panel receives energy from the Sun at a rate of 5.0 kW.
Thermal energy is transferred from the solar panel to water with an efficiency of 20%.
Cold water of mass 15 kg enters the solar panel every hour.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the temperature increase of the water.
temperature increase = .....................................................°C [4]
(b) State and explain one advantage and one disadvantage of heating the water in a solar panel
compared with heating the water in a coal-burning boiler.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer without a temperature scale.

The liquid inside the thermometer has a melting point of –39 °C.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe simple experiments to mark the positions of the fixed points on this liquid-in-glass
thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A scientist is measuring temperatures at the South Pole. These temperatures have a minimum
value of –90 °C.
State why the liquid used in the thermometer in Fig. 4.1 would not be suitable for this scientist.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State a design change that:
(i) increases the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) increases the range of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) State the property of the liquid which ensures that the scale on a liquid-in-glass thermometer
is linear.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

7
5 Fig. 5.1 shows crests of a wave approaching a barrier where the wave is reflected.
direction of travel of wave
crest
barrier
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw three crests of the reflected wave. [3]
(b) The wave has a wavelength of 36 cm and a speed of 1.2 m / s.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
(c) Complete the following sentences.
An echo is the name for a reflected .................................................................. wave.
The waves that form an echo are a type of longitudinal wave. Longitudinal waves are made
up of .................................................................. and rarefactions.

[2]
[Total: 8]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows an arrangement of glass prisms inside a box. The angles of the prisms are
45°, 45° and 90°.
box
prism 1
incident
ray of light
wall prism 2
eye
This is a device used to view objects that are behind a wall.

The incident ray of light undergoes total internal reflection in the prisms.
On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the device and show the ray as it emerges
from the box. [3]
(b) Show that the refractive index of glass with a critical angle of 45° is 1.41.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

9
7 (a) A student makes a transformer that uses an alternating current (a.c.) supply with an
electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12.0 V to induce an output potential difference (p.d.) of 2.0 V.
The student is provided with two lengths of insulated wire and the U-shaped piece of iron
shown in Fig. 7.1.
iron
Fig. 7.1
(i) Complete and label Fig. 7.1 to show the transformer connected to the supply and the
output from the transformer. [3]
(ii) Explain the function of the piece of iron in the transformer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The output of the transformer is connected to a lamp. The current in the lamp is 100 mA.
The transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Another transformer is used in a school laboratory to step down a mains supply with a p.d. of
110 V to 12 V. This transformer is mounted in a metal case.
State and explain an essential safety feature required for this arrangement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

10
8 (a) A light-emitting diode (LED) is a diode that emits light when there is a current in it. Draw a
circuit diagram showing an LED, connected so that it is lit, in series with a battery and a fixed
resistor. Use standard electrical symbols.
[4]
(b) The p.d. across the LED when lit is 3.1 V and the current in the LED is 0.030 A.
Calculate the value of the resistance of the LED when lit.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows a power supply of e.m.f. 10.5 V connected in series with a lamp and a heater.
The p.d. across the lamp is 2.1 V and the current in the lamp is 1.5 A.
Fig. 8.1
Calculate:
(i) the resistance of the heater
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the power of the heater.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20
11
9 (a) Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1 for a NAND gate.
Table 9.1
input 1 input 2 output

0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[1]
(b) The circuit shown in Fig. 9.1 contains two different types of gate, labelled X and Y.
A C
X
B
X E
Y D
Fig. 9.1
Table 9.2 shows a partially completed truth table for this circuit.
Table 9.2
input intermediate point output

A B C D E
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
(i) From Table 9.2, deduce the name of logic gate Y.
Ring your answer from the list.
AND NAND NOR NOT OR [1]
(ii) Complete the truth table in Table 9.2. [2]
(c) There is a current of 3.0 A in a copper wire. Calculate how many electrons pass through the
copper wire every 60 s. The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
number of electrons = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a vacuum tube with a radioactive source. The radioactive source emits α-particles,
β-particles and γ -rays. There is a very strong magnetic field between the N pole and the S pole of
the magnet.
lead cylinder with narrow
vacuum central hole
radioactive source
N
S
α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
Fig. 10.1
(a) The lead cylinder has a narrow central hole. State and explain the effect of the lead cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe the paths of the α-particles, β-particles and γ -rays as they pass through the magnetic
field. Explain your answers.
(i) α-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) β-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) γ -rays
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 4 0 8 5 1 2 0 6 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194262/3
2
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows two speed–time graphs, A and B, and two distance–time graphs, C and D.
speed speed
A
B
0 0
0 time 0 time
distance distance
C
D
0 0
0 time 0 time
Fig. 1.1
Describe the motion shown by:
(i) graph A ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) graph B ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) graph C .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) graph D. ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

3
2 A scientist fills a container with sea water. The container has dimensions 30 cm × 30 cm × 40 cm.
The density of sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the sea water in the container.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a submarine. The submarine is fully submerged in the sea.
hatch
top surface
submarine
Fig. 2.1
(i) The atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa and the total pressure on the top surface of the
submarine is 500 kPa.
Calculate the depth of the top surface of the submarine below the surface of the sea.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) A hatch (an opening door) on the top surface of the submarine has an area of 0.62 m2.
Calculate the downward force on the hatch due to the total pressure on the top surface
of the submarine.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

4
3 In a double-decker bus there are two passenger compartments, one above the other.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a double-decker bus on a tilted platform.
top compartment
bottom compartment
platform
angle
Fig. 3.1
The platform is used to test the stability of the bus.
The angle the bus makes with the horizontal is gradually increased until the bus begins to
topple to the left.
Explain why the bus begins to topple.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) There are 30 passengers in the upper compartment of the bus and 2 passengers in the
bottom compartment of the bus.
State how this affects the stability of the bus and the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

5
(c) A bus is travelling along a straight road. The bus and the driver have a combined mass of
16 000 kg when there are no passengers in it. The bus has 73 passengers. The average
mass of each of the passengers is 65 kg.
(i) Calculate the total mass of the bus, the driver and the 73 passengers.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The fully loaded bus accelerates uniformly from rest to a speed of 14 m / s. The time
taken to reach a speed of 14 m / s is 20 s.
Calculate the resultant force on the bus during the acceleration.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) Describe, in terms of molecules, what happens when a liquid evaporates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows wet clothes drying on a washing line in an outside area.
washing line
Fig. 4.1
State two changes in the weather that help the wet clothes to dry more quickly.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

7
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a plastic cup. The cup contains sand, an electric heater and a thermometer.
thermometer
electric
plastic heater
cup sand
Fig. 5.1
The power of the heater is 50 W. The mass of the sand in the cup is 550 g. The initial
temperature of the sand is 20 °C. The heater is switched on for 2.0 minutes. The temperature
is recorded until the temperature stops increasing. The highest temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 33 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy supplied by the heater.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of the sand, using your answer to (a)(i)
and the data in the question.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why the specific heat capacity of sand may be different from the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(b) On a sunny day, the temperature of the sand on a beach is much higher than the temperature
of the sea.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of a thermocouple thermometer.
[3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

9
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a sound wave after reflection from a solid surface.
direction
of travel of
reflected
wave
solid surface
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw three crests of the incident wave. [3]
(b) Tick four statements in the list below that are false for a sound wave that is audible to a
healthy human ear.
The wave is longitudinal.
The wave is transverse.
The frequency of the wave is 1 Hz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 kHz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 MHz.
The wave travels in a vacuum.
The wave could travel in aluminium.

[3]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of a sound wave in water.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows red light travelling from air into a prism made of diamond. The path of the red light
is incomplete.
A
y
x
40°
ray of
red light
diamond
(a) The refractive index of diamond is 2.42.
Calculate angle x.
angle x = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain the term total internal reflection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The angle y is greater than the critical angle of diamond.
On Fig. 7.1, draw the path of the red light through and out of the prism after point A. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

11
8 (a) (i) Describe what is meant by an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the direction of an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a polystyrene ball covered with aluminium paint. The polystyrene ball is
suspended between two charged metal plates by an insulated thread.
insulated thread
negatively charged
metal plate
positively
charged
metal plate polystyrene ball
covered with
aluminium paint
Fig. 8.1
The ball oscillates between the two charged plates.
Explain why the ball oscillates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) There is a current of 0.29 A in an electrical circuit.
Calculate the time taken for a charge of 15 C to flow through the electrical circuit.
time = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor. The coil rotates about the axis when
there is a current in the coil. The coil is connected to the rest of the circuit by the brushes.
axis
coil
S
N
brush
brush
+ –
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, draw a pair of arrows to show which way the coil rotates. Explain the direction
you have chosen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction in which electrons flow through the coil.
[1]
(iii) Explain why the electrons flow in the direction you have shown in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

13
(b) State any difference each of the following changes makes to the rotation of the coil in
Fig. 9.1:
(i) changing the polarity of the power supply to that shown in Fig. 9.2
– +
Fig. 9.2
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) changing the coil to the new coil shown in Fig. 9.3
original coil new coil
Fig. 9.3
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) using a stronger magnetic field.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) A radioactive nucleus of carbon decays to a nucleus of nitrogen by emitting a particle.
Complete the nuclide equation and state the name of the particle.
14 C 14 N + ..... X
6 7 .....
name of particle X …………………………………………….. [3]
(b) A radiation detector in a laboratory records a reading of 10 counts / min. There are no
radioactive samples in the laboratory.
(i) Explain why the radiation detector records a reading and suggest a possible source.
explanation ....................................................
source ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Carbon-14 has a half-life of 5700 years. There are atoms of carbon-14 in all living
organisms.
An archaeologist digs up some ancient wood. In the same laboratory as in (b)(i), a

sample of this ancient wood gives a reading of 20 counts / min. An equivalent sample of
living wood gives a reading of 80 counts / min. It is suggested that the age of the ancient
sample is 11 400 years.
Do a calculation to check whether this suggestion is correct.
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 4 5 4 8 7 2 4 9 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194261/3
2
1 An aeroplane of mass 2.5 × 105 kg lands with a speed of 62 m / s, on a horizontal runway at time
t = 0. The aeroplane decelerates uniformly as it travels along the runway in a straight line until it
reaches a speed of 6.0 m / s at t = 35 s.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the deceleration of the aeroplane in the 35 s after it lands
deceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the aeroplane as it decelerates
force = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) the momentum of the aeroplane when its speed is 6.0 m / s.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) At t = 35 s, the aeroplane stops decelerating and moves along the runway at a constant speed
of 6.0 m / s for a further 15 s.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch the shape of the graph for the distance travelled by the aeroplane along
the runway between t = 0 and t = 50 s. You are not required to calculate distance values.
distance
0
0 35 50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

3
(c) As the aeroplane decelerates, its kinetic energy decreases.
Suggest what happens to this energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is the extension–load graph for a light spring S.
30
extension / cm
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
load / N
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the range of loads for which S obeys Hooke’s law.
from ....................................................... to .......................................................... [1]
(b) Using information from Fig. 2.1, determine the spring constant k of spring S.
k = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

5
(c) A second spring, identical to spring S, is attached to spring S. The two springs are attached
to a rod, as shown in Fig. 2.2. A load of 4.0 N is suspended from the bottom of spring S. The
arrangement is in equilibrium.
rod
second spring
spring S
4.0 N load
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the name of the form of energy stored in the two springs when they are stretched.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Determine the extension of the arrangement in Fig. 2.2.
extension = ................................................... cm [1]
(iii) The load is carefully increased to 6.0 N in total.
Calculate the distance moved by the load to the new equilibrium position as the load
increases from 4.0 N to 6.0 N.
distance moved = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows gas trapped in the sealed end of a tube by a dense liquid.
open end
sealed
trapped gas end
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
dense liquid
Fig. 3.1
The scale marked on the sealed end of the tube is calibrated to read the volume of gas trapped
above the liquid surface. Fig. 3.1 shows that initially the volume V1 of the gas is 60 cm3.
The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
(a) State how Fig. 3.1 shows that the pressure of the trapped gas is equal to the pressure of the
atmosphere.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain, in terms of the momentum of its molecules, why the trapped gas exerts a pressure
on the walls of the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

7
(c) More of the dense liquid is poured into the open end of the tube. The level of the liquid surface
in both the sealed and the open ends of the tube rises as shown in Fig. 3.2. The temperature
of the trapped gas and atmospheric pressure both remain constant.
open end
15 cm
sealed
trapped gas end
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
dense liquid
Fig. 3.2
(i) In the sealed end of the tube, the volume V2 of the trapped gas is 50 cm3. In the open
end of the tube, the liquid surface is 15 cm above the new level in the sealed tube.
Calculate the pressure p2 of the trapped gas.
pressure p2 = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the density of the liquid in the tube.
density = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

8
4 Water has a specific heat capacity of 4200 J / (kg °C) and a boiling point of 100 °C.
(a) State what is meant by boiling point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A mass of 0.30 kg of water at its boiling point is poured into a copper container which is
initially at 11 °C. After a few seconds, the temperature of the container and the water are both
95 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the water.
energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the thermal capacity of the copper container.
thermal capacity of the copper container = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Water from the container evaporates and the temperature of the remaining water
decreases slowly.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining
water to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

9
5 The distance between the centre of a thin converging lens and each principal focus is 5.0 cm.
(a) Describe what is meant by the term principal focus for a thin converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The lens is used as a magnifying glass to produce an image I of an object O.
(i) Underline the terms that describe the nature of the image produced by a magnifying
glass. [2]
diminished enlarged inverted real same size upright virtual
(ii) Fig. 5.1 is a full-scale diagram of the lens and the image I.
centre of lens
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 5.1 (full-scale)
1. On Fig. 5.1, mark both principal focuses and label each of them F. [1]
2. By drawing on Fig. 5.1, find the position of object O and add object O to the diagram.
[3]
(iii) Using Fig. 5.1, determine the distance of object O from the centre of the lens.
distance = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

10
6 The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
(a) Calculate the range of wavelengths for sounds that are audible by a healthy human ear.
wavelengths range from ................................. to ................................. [2]
(b) Sound waves are longitudinal waves.
Describe how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Fig. 6.1 shows a band in front of a building.
Fig. 6.1
The drum produces a low frequency sound. Other musical instruments produce a high
frequency sound. These sounds are equally loud.
A young man at the side of the building hears the drum but not the high frequency sounds
from the other musical instruments.
Explain why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

11
7 An electromagnet consists of a solenoid X that is made of copper wire. The solenoid contains an
iron core.
(a) Explain why:
(i) the structure of copper makes it a suitable material for the wire
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) iron is a suitable material for the core of an electromagnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows the electromagnet inside a second solenoid Y.
terminals of Y
solenoid X iron core
solenoid Y
a.c. power supply
Fig. 7.1
(i) Describe and explain what happens in solenoid Y when solenoid X is connected to an
alternating current (a.c.) power supply.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) A switch and a lamp are connected in series with the terminals of solenoid Y. When the
switch is closed, the lamp lights up at normal brightness.
Describe and explain what happens to the current in solenoid X when the switch is
closed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
12
8 The power supply used in an electric vehicle contains 990 rechargeable cells each of electromotive
force (e.m.f.) 1.2 V.
The cells are contained in packs in which all the cells are in series with each other. The e.m.f. of
each pack is 54 V.
(a) Calculate the number of packs in the power supply.
number of packs = ......................................................... [2]
(b) When in use, each pack supplies a current of 3.5 A.
(i) Calculate the rate at which each cell is transferring chemical energy to electrical energy.
rate of energy transfer = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The packs are connected in parallel to supply a large current to drive the electric vehicle.
Explain why it is necessary to use thick wires to carry this current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

13
9 (a) Describe how a digital signal differs from an analogue signal. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) In the appropriate box, draw the symbol for an AND gate and the symbol for an OR gate.
AND gate OR gate
[1]
(ii) State how the behaviour of an AND gate differs from that of an OR gate.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
(c) An arrangement of logic gates A, B and C is shown in Fig. 9.1. The arrangement has two
inputs, X and Y and two outputs P and Q.
X B
P
Y
Fig. 9.1
Output P of logic gate B has logic state 1 (high).
(i) Determine the logic states of the two inputs of logic gate B.
upper input = ...............................................................
lower input = ...............................................................

[1]
(ii) Determine and explain the logic state of output Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
logic state of Q = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

15
10 Fig. 10.1 represents a neutral atom of an isotope of element X.
Fig. 10.1
(a) State one similarity between this atom and a neutral atom of a different isotope of element X.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The isotope of element X is radioactive. It decays to form an isotope of element Y by emitting
a β-particle.
(i) Using Fig. 10.1 deduce the nuclide notation for the isotope of Y produced by this decay.
......
nuclide notation:
...... Y [3]
(ii) β-particles ionise the air they pass through less strongly than the same number of
α-particles.
Suggest why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 3 2 4 5 0 9 7 6 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
[No additional materials are needed.]
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CJ/CGW) 203605/2
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a piece of glass of thickness 2.0 cm and area 0.15 m2.
The density of the glass is 2.6 × 103 kg / m3.
area 0.15 m2
thickness 2.0 cm
Calculate the weight of the piece of glass.
weight = ..................................................... [3]
(b) The piece of glass shown in Fig. 1.1 is used as the vertical viewing window of an aquarium.
The atmospheric pressure outside the aquarium is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The average pressure on
the inside of the aquarium window is 1.3 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the resultant force acting on the window due to these pressures and state the
direction in which it acts.
force = ...........................................................
direction of force ..............................................................

[4]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows a vacuum pump connected to the top of a vertical tube with its lower end
immersed in a tank of liquid. The pump reduces the pressure above the column to zero and
the pressure at point X is 9.6 × 104 Pa.
vacuum
pump
point X
12 m
liquid
density = ..................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

4
2 (a) (i) State what is meant by the moment of a force about a point.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 2.1 shows a large crane on a construction site lifting a block of mass 14 000 kg.
operator’s cabin 20 m
A B
counterweight
block
Fig. 2.1
Calculate the moment about A due to the 14 000 kg block suspended from B.
moment = ..................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity. State the difference between
a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write down one other scalar quantity and one other vector quantity.
scalar quantity ...................................................................................................................
vector quantity ...................................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

5
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows two forces acting on an object.
60° 30 N
20 N
Draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant force acting on the object. State the scale
you use.
scale ..............................................................
magnitude of resultant force = ...........................................................
direction of resultant relative to the direction of the 20 N force = ...........................................................

[4]
[Total: 11]
6
3 A power station burns waste materials from farm crops to generate electricity.
(a) State and explain whether this process is renewable.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The power station uses some of its waste thermal energy to heat water for houses in a nearby
town.
State one problem of using waste energy in this way if the power station is far from the town.
...................................................................................................................................................
Suggest a way of reducing this problem.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two environmental consequences of burning coal to generate electricity.
consequence 1. ........................................................................................................................
consequence 2. ........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

7
4 (a) In terms of the momentum of molecules, explain how a gas exerts pressure on the walls of its
container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A fixed mass of gas of volume V1 is at a pressure p1. It is compressed to a volume V2.
(i) Complete the equation for the final pressure p2 of the gas when the gas is compressed
at constant temperature.
p2 =
[2]
(ii) State and explain how the final pressure compares with p2 when the temperature of the
gas increases during compression.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) State the name of the reflection of a sound wave or ultrasound wave.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an ultrasound wave being used to scan an internal organ of a human body.
ultrasound transmitter
and receiver
internal organ
ultrasound
wave
Fig. 5.1
The ultrasound wave has a frequency of 2.0 MHz and passes through human tissue at a
speed of 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the ultrasound wave in human tissue.
wavelength = ..................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 5.2 shows crests of a wave from a point source S approaching a straight barrier.
straight barrier
S
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2, indicate and label one wavelength.
(ii) On Fig. 5.2, draw three crests of the wave reflected from the barrier.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21
9
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a full scale diagram showing a converging lens, the two principal focuses F1 and F2
and an object PO.
F1 P F2
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw two rays from point O of the object to determine the position of the image.
Label the image IJ. Measure the length of the image.
image length = ...........................................................

[3]
(b) Ring three descriptions of the image.
diminished magnified real same size
same way up as object upside down compared to object virtual [3]

10
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows three rays of green light passing through glass blocks.
ray of green light
glass blocks
Fig. 6.2
Three rays of red light approach the glass blocks on the same paths as the rays of green
light.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the paths of these rays of red light to the right of the glass blocks. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a horizontal conducting wire XY between two opposite magnetic poles. Wire XY
forms a circuit with an ammeter.
wire
N X
S
A
Fig. 7.1
(a) Explain why the reading on the ammeter is zero when the wire XY is not moving.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The wire XY is moved and there is a deflection on the ammeter that indicates there is a
current in the wire from X to Y.
On Table 7.1, tick one box to indicate the direction of the movement of the wire XY and
explain your answer.
Table 7.1
into page out of page to the left to the right to the bottom to the top of
of the page the page
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) State what is observed on the ammeter when the wire XY is moved
(i) in the opposite direction to part (b) ............................................................................... [1]
(ii) in the same direction as part (b) but at a greater speed ............................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

12
8 (a) Define electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a source E of e.m.f. 60 V in a circuit.
10 Ω
Fig. 8.1
The heater H has a resistance of 22.5 Ω and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 45 V.
Calculate:
(i) the power of the heater
power = ..................................................... [3]
(ii) the p.d. across resistor X
p.d. = ..................................................... [2]
(iii) the current in the 10 Ω resistor.
current = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

13
9 (a) Write down the truth table for an OR gate.
[2]
(b) Draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit designed to produce the values shown in Table 9.1 for the
output S from the two inputs P and Q.
P gate X
S
Q R
Fig. 9.1
(i) Table 9.1 is the truth table for the circuit shown in Fig. 9.1.
Table 9.1
P Q R S
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
Complete the column for point R in Table 9.1. [1]
(ii) State which type of gate is used for gate X. Explain your answer.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
14
10 (a) State the proton number, nucleon number and the value of the charge on an α-particle.
proton number ..........................................................................................................................
nucleon number ........................................................................................................................
charge .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A nucleus of strontium-90 consists of 38 protons and 52 neutrons. Strontium-90 is radioactive

and decays by β-emission to an isotope of yttrium. The symbol for strontium is Sr and the
symbol for yttrium is Y. Write down the nuclide equation of this decay.
[3]
(c) The half-life of radon-220 is 56 s. A sample of radon-220 is in a container. After 112 s the mass
of radon-220 is 9.2 mg.
Calculate the mass of the original sample.
mass = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 1 4 5 4 7 0 3 0 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/JG) 198539/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a load suspended from a spring.
spring
load
Fig. 1.1
The value of the spring constant k of the spring is 0.20 N / cm. The spring reaches its limit of
proportionality when the load is 15 N.
(a) Calculate the extension of the spring when the load is 3.0 N.
extension = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain what is meant by the term limit of proportionality of the spring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) On Fig. 1.2, sketch an extension–load graph for a spring. Label the limit of proportionality with
the letter L on your graph.
extension
0
0 load
Fig. 1.2
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21
3
(d) The load is pulled down a small distance below its equilibrium position to position A, as shown
in Fig. 1.3. The load then moves up and down between position A and position B in Fig. 1.3.
position B
position A
Fig. 1.3
Describe the energy transfers which occur as the load moves:
from position A to the equilibrium position
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
from the equilibrium position to position B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]

4
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a bookshelf with two groups of books A and B on it. There are six books in
each group of books. All the books are identical. The mass of each book is 0.52 kg.
21 cm
1.3 cm
21 cm
30 cm
30 cm
1.3 cm
shelf
group A group B
of books of books
Fig. 2.1
(i) Explain why the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group B is less than the
pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Calculate the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group A.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
(b) A diver dives to a depth below the surface of the sea where the total pressure is 3.0 × 105 Pa.
The atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of the sea water is 1030 kg / m3.
Calculate the depth of the diver below the surface of the sea.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

5
3 A car travels at constant speed v on a horizontal, straight road. The driver sees an obstacle on the
road ahead.
(a) The distance travelled in the time between the driver seeing the obstruction and applying the
brakes is the thinking distance.
Explain why the thinking distance is directly proportional to v.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) When the brakes are applied, the car decelerates uniformly to rest. The frictional force applied
by the brakes is constant. The distance travelled between first applying the brakes and the
car stopping is the braking distance.
Explain why the braking distance is proportional to v 2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The car is travelling at 22 m / s.
(i) The thinking distance is 15 m.
Calculate the time taken to travel the thinking distance.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The car has a mass of 1400 kg. The time taken for the car to stop after the brakes are
applied is 2.1 s.
Calculate the force required to stop the car in this time.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
6
4 (a) (i) Define specific latent heat of fusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) A cup of water contains 250 cm3 of water at a temperature of 0 °C. An identical cup
contains 250 cm3 of a mixture of ice and water at a temperature of 0 °C.
The temperature of the surrounding air is 20 °C.
State and explain which cup contains the liquid with the lower temperature after
10 minutes.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) On a hot day, sweat forms on a person’s skin and then evaporates.
Explain, in terms of molecules, how the evaporation of sweat cools the person.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why this process is more effective when a wind is blowing.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

7
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a wave on the sea approaching a harbour.
harbour walls
harbour
wave crests
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, draw three wave crests in the harbour. [2]
(ii) Another harbour has a much wider gap between its walls.
Describe and explain how the pattern of wave crests in this harbour is different from the
pattern you have drawn in (i).
description ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(b) A sound wave of frequency 850 Hz travels through sea water. The speed of sound in sea
water is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of this sound wave in sea water.
wavelength = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

9
6 Fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram of a lens and an object O.
lens
Fig. 6.1
(a) The focal length of the lens is 3.5 cm.
On Fig. 6.1, mark and label with the letter F the positions of the two principal focuses. [1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw three rays to locate the image. Draw an arrow to represent the image and
label the image I. [3]
(c) State three properties of the image I.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) A student incorrectly states that this lens is being used as a magnifying glass.
(i) State how the image produced by a magnifying glass is different from the image I.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The student moves the object O to a position P so that the lens shown in Fig. 6.1 acts as
a magnifying glass.
On Fig. 6.1, mark a possible position for P. [1]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) Define electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
P Q
Fig. 7.1
The two lamps shown are identical. Each lamp has a potential difference (p.d.) of 3.0 V across
it and a current of 2.0 A in it. PQ is a length of uniform metal wire. The resistance of PQ is R.
(i) Calculate the value of R.
R = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Another piece of wire is made of the same metal as PQ. The length of the new piece
of wire is twice the length of PQ. The diameter of the new piece of wire is twice the
diameter of PQ.
Calculate the resistance of the new piece of wire.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

11
8 (a) State the difference between an analogue signal and a digital signal. You may draw a diagram
to help explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]

12
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows a combination of logic gates X, Y and Z. The gates are not represented by the
standard symbols.
A logic
B gate D logic logic
X E F
gate gate
C
Y Z
Fig. 8.1
Table 8.1 shows a partly completed truth table for this combination of logic gates.
Table 8.1
intermediate
inputs output
points
A B C D E F
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1
(i) From Table 8.1, deduce:
1. the name of logic gate X
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. the name of logic gate Y.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Logic gate Z is a NAND gate.
Complete column F of Table 8.1. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

13
9 (a) An X-ray machine requires a supply of 110 kV. The mains electricity supply is 230 V. A
transformer is used to supply the correct voltage to the X-ray machine. There are 50 turns on
the primary coil of the transformer.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-down transformer. On the labels, state a suitable material
for each of the components.
[3]
(c) Explain how a transformer operates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a beam of radiation in a vacuum. The beam contains α-particles, β-particles
and γ-rays.
region of uniform
magnetic field out of the page
beam of radiation,
containing α, β and
γ-rays
Fig. 10.1
The beam enters a region where there is a strong, uniform magnetic field. The direction of the
magnetic field is out of the page.
On Fig. 10.1, mark and label the paths through the magnetic field of:
(i) α-particles (label this path α) [1]
(ii) β-particles (label this path β) [2]
(iii) γ-rays (label this path γ). [1]
(b) Radioactive sources have many uses in medicine.
State two safety precautions which hospital staff take when working with γ-ray sources.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

15
(c) The radioactive isotope iodine-131 is used as a tracer in medical diagnosis. A nucleus of
iodine-131 contains 53 protons and 78 neutrons. The symbol for iodine is I.
(i) Use nuclide notation to show this isotope of iodine.
[1]
(ii) Iodine-131 emits γ-radiation. It has a half-life of 8 hours.
Explain why this emission and this half-life make iodine-131 a suitable material for a
tracer in medical diagnosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 2 9 1 3 2 6 1 6 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/JG) 198541/2
2
1 A skydiver of mass 76 kg is falling vertically in still air. At time t = 0, the skydiver opens his
parachute.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed–time graph for the skydiver from t = 0.
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using Fig. 1.1, determine:
(i) the deceleration of the skydiver immediately after the parachute opens
deceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the force due to air resistance acting on the skydiver immediately after the parachute
opens.
force = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the skydiver, his motion between t = 0 and t = 6.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Explain why opening the parachute cannot reduce the speed of the skydiver to zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a wooden trolley of mass 1.2 kg at rest on the rough surface of a bench.
trolley
ball
Fig. 2.1
A ball of mass 0.52 g travels horizontally towards the trolley. The ball embeds itself in the wood of
the trolley. The trolley moves with an initial speed of 0.065 m / s.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the impulse exerted on the trolley
impulse = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the speed of the ball as it hits the trolley.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(b) As the trolley moves across the rough surface, it slows down and stops.
Explain, in terms of the work done, the energy change that takes place as the trolley slows
down.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]

4
3 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are very difficult to compress.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a device that uses liquid pressure to lift heavy boxes.
boxes
cylinder
piston
moving oil
oil
pump
Fig. 3.1
The boxes are lifted by pumping oil into the cylinder.
The force upwards on the piston due to the oil, and the force downwards on the piston due to
the air above the piston, combine to produce a constant force of 8800 N.
The pressure of the air is 1.0 × 105 Pa and the cross-sectional area of the bottom surface of
the piston is 0.016 m2.
(i) Calculate the pressure of the oil at the bottom surface of the piston.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

5
(ii) As the boxes are lifted, the depth of the oil increases.
Explain why the pump must exert an increasing pressure on the oil as the depth of the oil
increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest one reason why the force of 8800 N in (b) cannot lift boxes of weight 8800 N.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

6
4 An aluminium saucepan with a plastic handle contains cold water.
Fig. 4.1 shows the saucepan on a hotplate.
aluminium saucepan
plastic handle
water
hotplate
Fig. 4.1
(a) State why the pan is made from aluminium but the handle is made from plastic.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The hotplate is switched on and, as the temperature of the water increases, the internal
energy of the water increases.
(i) State, in terms of molecules, what is meant by an increase in internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of the atomic lattice and electrons, how thermal energy is transferred
through the aluminium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Eventually, the water reaches boiling point. Thermal energy from the hotplate is still
being transferred to the water.
Explain, in terms of molecules, the effect of this thermal energy on the water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21
7
(iv) The mass of the water decreases by 0.11 kg in 300 s. The specific latent heat of
vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg.
Calculate the rate at which the water gains thermal energy.
rate of gain of energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]

8
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the structure of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
bulb glass
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
°C
liquid
Fig. 5.1
The bulb of the thermometer is placed into a beaker of warm water. As the liquid expands, it
moves along the tube.
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands when heated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands more than a solid when heated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A second thermometer has a larger bulb that contains more of the same liquid than the
thermometer shown in Fig. 5.1. It has a different scale. In every other way, it is identical.
(i) Explain how the sensitivity of the second thermometer compares with the sensitivity of
the thermometer in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the range of the second thermometer compares with the range of the
thermometer in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

9
(d) (i) State one everyday problem that is a result of thermal expansion.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest and explain one way of solving this problem.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

10
6 Fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram that represents a sound wave travelling in air.
direction of travel
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, mark two points, each at the centre of a different compression. Label both of the
points C. [1]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Measure the diagram and determine the frequency of the sound.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

11
(c) The wave reaches a barrier. Fig. 6.2 shows the wave passing through a gap in the barrier.
barrier
direction of travel
Fig. 6.2
The frequency of the wave is increased to a value many times greater than the value obtained
in (b).
Describe and explain two ways in which a diagram representing the wave with the greater
frequency differs from Fig. 6.2.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]

12
7 Fig. 7.1 represents an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
N direction of
rotation
X
Y
Fig. 7.1
(a) A student rotates the handle H, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
(i) On Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) between
terminals X and Y varies with time during two complete revolutions of the coil.
Fig. 7.2
[3]
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, mark and label a point P, for the e.m.f. when the coil is horizontal, as shown
in Fig. 7.1. [1]
(iii) The student turns the handle more quickly.
State two ways in which the e.m.f. between terminals X and Y changes.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

13
(b) Terminals X and Y are connected to the primary coil of a transformer.
State and explain what happens in the transformer as the student turns the handle of the a.c.
generator.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Explain why the power losses in transmission cables are lower when electrical energy is
transmitted at higher voltages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

14
8 A student sets up a circuit that includes a 12 V battery, an 800 Ω resistor, a voltmeter and a
thermistor. Fig. 8.1 is an incomplete circuit diagram because the symbol for the thermistor is
missing.
800 Ω
12 V
P
V
Fig. 8.1
The thermistor is connected between terminals P and Q.
(a) Complete Fig. 8.1 by drawing the symbol for a thermistor between terminals P and Q. [1]
(b) The 12 V battery consists of eight identical cells connected in series.
Calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of each cell.
e.m.f. = ......................................................... [1]
(c) The reading on the voltmeter is 8.0 V.
(i) Determine the resistance of the thermistor.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) A few hours later, the student notices that the reading on the voltmeter is greater.
Explain what can be deduced from this observation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

15
9 There are three naturally occurring isotopes of hydrogen: hydrogen-1, hydrogen-2 and hydrogen-3.
The nuclide notation for hydrogen-1 is 11
. H
(a) Write down the symbol, using nuclide notation, for:
hydrogen-2 ...................................
hydrogen-3. ..................................
[1]
(b) In a fusion reactor, a nucleus of hydrogen-2 and a nucleus of hydrogen-3 undergo fusion.
(i) State what is meant by nuclear fusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The fusion reaction produces a free neutron and one other particle.
Write down, using nuclide notation, the equation that represents this reaction.
[3]
(c) Nuclear fusion in the Sun is the source of most but not all of the resources that are used to
generate electrical energy on Earth.
State two resources for which nuclear fusion in the Sun is not the source.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 8 7 2 9 6 7 8 8 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 16 pages.
DC (ST/JG) 198540/2
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a sealed weather balloon which is stationary in still air.
weather
balloon
instruments
Fig. 1.1
State whether the overall density of the balloon and its instruments is greater than, less than,
or the same as the density of the surrounding air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) At night, the gas inside the balloon cools. The pressure of the air outside the balloon remains
the same.
(i) State whether the balloon rises, falls or remains stationary.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

3
(c) An object is released from the balloon. It starts at rest and eventually reaches a constant
speed.
(i) On the axes of Fig. 1.2, sketch a speed–time graph to show this motion.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
[3]
(ii) State the values of the initial acceleration and the final acceleration of the object.
initial acceleration ..............................................................................................................
final acceleration ...............................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 (a) Define the moment of a force.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows an object of negligible weight. The object is in equilibrium.
rope
object pulley
20 cm
pivot P
50 kg
mass
12 cm
force F
Fig. 2.1
The object is free to rotate about its pivot P.
Calculate the value of force F.
F = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Describe an experiment involving vertical forces to show that there is no net moment on an
object in equilibrium. You may draw a diagram in the space provided.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21
5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows water flowing at very slow speed over a cliff edge.
water
cliff edge
15 m
rocks
Fig. 3.1
The water falls 15 m onto the rocks below.
(a) Show that the velocity of the water when it strikes the rocks is 17 m / s.
[4]
(b) 30 kg of water flows over the cliff edge every second.
Calculate the force exerted by the rocks on the falling water. Ignore any splashing.
force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) Pollen particles are mixed into a liquid. They are seen to move when observed through a
microscope.
(i) Describe this movement.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain this movement in terms of the molecules of the liquid and the pollen particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) Medical professionals sometimes rub ethanol over the skin of a patient. Ethanol
evaporates readily at room temperature and has a high specific latent heat of vaporisation.
State whether the patient experiences heating, cooling or neither at the site where the
ethanol is applied. Explain your answer.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State any effect on the rate of evaporation of ethanol when a fan blows air over the
patient’s skin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

7
5 (a) A machine delivers a hot drink in a plastic cup, which is uncomfortably hot to hold.
Fig. 5.1 shows the cup with the hot drink.
hot drink
plastic cup
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2a shows the cup with the hot drink and a holder for the sides of the cup.
Fig. 5.2b shows a cross-section through the holder. The holder is made from two strong paper
cylinders separated by a wavy piece of strong paper to make air gaps.
hot drink
plastic cup holder
holder
Fig. 5.2a Fig. 5.2b
Explain how using the holder makes it more comfortable to hold the cup.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A student carries out experiments on the cooling of the hot drink described in (a), with and
without the holder in place. He finds that the holder only reduces the rate of cooling slightly.
Suggest and explain another action that reduces the rate of cooling more effectively.
suggestion ................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) State the method of thermal energy transfer from a star through the vacuum of space.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of green light passing through a prism.
prism
ray of
green light
Fig. 6.1
A ray of blue light is directed towards the prism on the same path as the ray of green light.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the path of the blue light through and out of the prism. [3]
(b) The wavelength of the blue light in air is 4.8 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the frequency of the blue light.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows two magnets and the gap between the N pole of one magnet and the S pole of
the other magnet.
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw three lines to show the pattern and direction of the magnetic field in the
gap. [2]
(b) (i) Fig. 7.2 is a repeat of Fig. 7.1 showing the two magnets.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of a plotting compass needle when it comes to rest in the
gap between the N pole and the S pole.
Fig. 7.2 [1]
(ii) Explain why the needle comes to rest in this position.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe a method of demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
10
8 (a) Two identical radioactive sources emit α-particles and γ-rays into two vacuum tubes.
(i) Fig. 8.1 shows two electrically charged plates on either side of one of the vacuum tubes.
plate at +2500 V
vacuum
source
initial path of
beam of α-particles
and γ-rays
plate at –2500 V
Fig. 8.1
Write the symbol α once in Table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the α-particles.
Write the symbol γ once in Table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the γ-rays.
Table 8.1
towards bottom of towards top of

into page out of page no deflection
page page
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

11
(ii) Fig. 8.2 shows the poles of a very strong magnet on either side of the other vacuum
tube.
N pole of
strong magnet
vacuum
source N
initial path of
beam of α-particles S
and γ-rays
S pole of
strong magnet
Fig. 8.2
Write the symbol α once in Table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the α-particles.
Write the symbol γ once in Table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the γ-rays.
Table 8.2
towards bottom of towards top of

into page out of page no deflection
page page
[2]

12
(b) Fig. 8.3 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor with a split-ring commutator.
split-ring
brush
coil
N S
Fig. 8.3
(i) State and explain the direction of rotation of the coil as seen from point X.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The coil rotates through 90° from the position shown.
State what happens to the moment in this position.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The coil is rotated through 180° from the position shown. By considering the forces on
the coil, explain how the split-ring commutator enables the motor to turn continuously.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

13
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit.
M A
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, draw two clearly labelled arrows to show the direction of the electron flow and
the direction of the conventional current in the circuit. [2]
(b) The current in the motor is 13 A. The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Calculate the number of electrons that pass through the motor every second.
number of electrons = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the potential difference–current graph for a circuit component K.
10.0
8.0
potential difference / V
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
current / mA
Fig. 10.1
Calculate the resistance of component K when the current in it is 4.0 mA.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a circuit containing component K.
component K
point X
resistor R
Fig. 10.2
At low temperature, component K has a much greater resistance than resistor R.
At high temperature, component K has a much smaller resistance than resistor R.
State and explain the effect on the lamp when the temperature changes from very low to very
high.
Refer to the voltage at point X in your explanation.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State the name of component K.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

16
11 (a) A student investigates a radioactive substance in a laboratory.
Fig. 11.1 is a graph showing the count rate detected as the substance decays for 7.5 minutes.
250
count rate
counts / min
200
150
100
50
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
time / min
Fig. 11.1
The background radiation is 20 counts / min.
(i) Determine the half-life of the substance.
half-life = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Calculate the count rate detected at time = 9.6 minutes.
count rate = .......................................counts / min [2]
(b) The substance emits α-particles and γ-rays. The student suggests that it is safe to store the
substance in a plastic container of thickness 2 mm.
State and explain whether the student’s suggestion is correct.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 2 8 7 9 7 4 1 8 6 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (PQ/FC) 214506/2
2
1 A ship sails in a straight line between two ports.

Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph of the ship for the first 100 minutes of its journey between
the two ports.
20
speed
15
m/s
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the maximum acceleration during the first 100 minutes of the ship’s journey.
maximum acceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the total distance travelled by the ship between time = 42 min and time = 100 min.
distance travelled = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21
3
(c) At a time not shown on the graph, the acceleration of the ship is 0.0087 m / s2. The total mass
of the ship and its passengers is 2.3 × 107 kg.
(i) Calculate the resultant force on the ship.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the force on the ship due to the ship’s engine is greater than the value you
calculated in (c)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simplified version of a ‘gravity lamp’. This apparatus is used to light a
light-emitting diode (LED) without mains electricity.
attachment to ceiling
LED generator
strap
12 kg load
Fig. 2.1
The load of 12 kg is raised to a height of 1.7 m above the ground. The load is connected to a
pulley system. The time taken for the load to fall to the ground is 1200 seconds. The load falls at
constant speed. The generator is connected to an LED.
(a) Calculate the rate of transfer of gravitational potential energy as the load falls to the ground.
rate of transfer of gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

5
(b) The light output of the LED is 0.10 W.

Calculate the efficiency of the ‘gravity lamp’.
efficiency = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest a social or environmental advantage of using a ‘gravity lamp’.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

6
3 (a) A gas bubble is released at the bottom of a lake.
Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3. The temperature
of the water in the lake is constant.
(i) The gas bubble rises to the surface. The volume of the gas bubble increases as it rises
higher in the water.
Explain why the volume of the bubble increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The volume of the gas bubble is 0.40 cm3 when it is 3.0 m below the surface of the lake.
Calculate the volume of the gas bubble when it is 0.50 m below the surface of the lake.
volume = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

7
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of a hydraulic press used to compress paper for recycling.
force
applied
paper to be
compressed
piston A
piston B
oil
Fig. 3.1
When a force is applied to piston A, it causes a pressure in the oil. This pressure produces an
upwards force on piston B. As piston B moves, it compresses the paper.
A small quantity of air leaks into the oil.
Suggest and explain the effect the air has on the operation of the hydraulic press.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

8
4 Explain what happens to the pressure of a constant volume of air when the temperature of the air
increases. Use ideas of momentum of molecules in your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

9
5 (a) An aluminium saucepan and a steel saucepan have the same dimensions. Table 5.1 shows
the values of the specific heat capacity and the density of aluminium and of steel.
Table 5.1
specific heat capacity density

metal
J / (kg °C) kg / m3
aluminium 0.91 2600
steel 0.50 7600
The mass of the aluminium saucepan is 0.41 kg.
(i) Calculate the mass of the steel saucepan.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the thermal capacity of the aluminium saucepan.
thermal capacity = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Water is heated in the steel saucepan. The initial temperature of the water and the
saucepan is 20 °C.
Calculate the energy transfer needed to raise the temperature of the steel saucepan to
100 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why metals are better thermal conductors than non-metals.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

10
6 (a) Describe an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air. State the apparatus you
need, details of how to take measurements and how to calculate the speed of sound in air.
You may use the space below to draw a labelled diagram as part of your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Sound waves from a television are diffracted through doorways. Light waves from a television
are not diffracted through doorways.
Suggest why light waves and sound waves behave differently in this situation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21
11
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of green light emerging from one face of a glass prism.
prism
ray of
green light
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw the path of the green light entering and passing through the prism. [2]
(ii) The green light is monochromatic. State, in terms of a wave property, what is meant by
monochromatic light.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) State the speed of light in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The wavelength of green light in air is 5.2 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the frequency of green light.
frequency = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) The refractive index of glass for green light is 1.52.
Calculate the speed of green light in glass.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

12
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows two charged metal plates with a gap between them. The plates are parallel to
each other. The top plate is negatively charged and the bottom plate is positively charged.
– – – – –
+ + + + +
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw five electric field lines between the two plates. [2]
(b) An electric iron has a power of 2400 W. The potential difference (p.d.) of the mains supply is
220 V.
(i) Calculate the electric current in the iron.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the electric charge which flows through the iron in 15 minutes.
charge = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Fuse ratings of 3 A, 5 A, 10 A, 13 A and 30 A are available.
State which of these fuse ratings is suitable for use in the iron.
fuse rating ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

13
BLANK PAGE

14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current–potential difference (p.d.) graphs for a resistor, a thermistor and a filament
lamp.
1.0
filament lamp
current / A 0.8
resistor
0.6
0.4
thermistor
0.2
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
p.d. / V
Fig. 9.1
The resistor, the thermistor and the filament lamp are connected in series with a power supply.
(a) (i) Draw a circuit diagram for this circuit.
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

15
(ii) Add a voltmeter to your circuit diagram in (a)(i) in a correct position to measure the p.d.
across the resistor. [1]
(iii) Using the graph in Fig. 9.1, determine the p.d. across the terminals of the power supply
when the p.d. across the resistor is 6.0 V.
p.d. across terminals of power supply = ......................................................... [4]
(b) Describe a practical use for a thermistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

16
10 (a) A transformer has 500 turns on the primary coil and 25 turns on the secondary coil. The input
voltage is 120 V.
(i) Calculate the output voltage.
output voltage = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The current in the primary coil is 125 mA. The transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the output current.
output current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a loose wire connected in a circuit with a d.c. (direct current) power supply
and a switch. The length of the wire between the two supports is in the magnetic field of a
horseshoe magnet.
S
support support
N
d.c. power supply magnet
switch
Fig. 10.1
The power supply is switched on and the wire moves down.
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw an arrow on the wire to show the direction of the current. [1]
(ii) The power supply is switched off and the wire returns to its original position. The power
supply is then switched on so that the current is in the opposite direction.
State and explain what happens to the wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21
17
(c) A split-ring commutator is an important feature of a d.c. motor.
Suggest one reason why the d.c. motor cannot operate without a split-ring commutator.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

18
11 (a) A detector of radioactivity is placed in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples. A
student notices that the detector shows a count rate that varies between 20 counts / min and
24 counts / min.
(i) Suggest a source of these readings.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why these readings are not constant.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A nucleus of uranium (U) contains 92 protons and 146 neutrons. It decays by emitting an
α-particle to become a nucleus of thorium (Th).
Complete the nuclide equation for this radioactive decay.
..... ..... .....

..... U ..... Th + .....α
[3]
(c) An isotope of radon has a half-life of 3.8 days. It decays by emitting α-radiation.
Calculate the time taken for 16 mg of this isotope to decay to 2 mg of this isotope.
time = ................................................ days [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/O/N/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 6 4 6 1 2 2 8 1 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (RW/JG) 214504/3
2
1 Some physical quantities are scalars and other physical quantities are vectors.
(a) State how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Circle the vector quantities in the list.
acceleration energy mass momentum temperature time speed velocity
[2]
(c) A microphone in a recording studio has a mass of 0.55 kg and a weight W.
(i) Calculate W.
W = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) The microphone is suspended from the ceiling by a cord attached to a small ring. Fig. 1.1
shows the microphone pulled to one side and kept stationary by a horizontal thread.
ceiling
cord
horizontal thread
ring
microphone
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

3
The tension T in the horizontal thread is 8.1 N.
Determine graphically the magnitude and the direction, relative to the vertical, of the
resultant of W and T. Use a scale of 1.0 cm to 1.0 N or greater.
magnitude of resultant = ................................................................
direction of resultant = ................................... relative to vertical

[3]
(iii) State and explain how the magnitude and direction of the resultant in (c)(ii) compares
with the force on the ring due to the tension in the cord.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 A student carries out an experiment using a plastic beaker that contains 0.24 kg of water at 17 °C.
The thermal capacity (heat capacity) of the beaker is negligible.
(a) Define thermal capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Several ice cubes are at a temperature of 0 °C. The ice cubes are dropped into the water and
the internal energy of the water decreases.
(i) Give a simple molecular account of this decrease in internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the decrease in the internal energy of the water as its temperature decreases
from 17 °C to 0 °C.
decrease in internal energy = .......................................................... [2]
(c) As the temperature of the water decreases, some of the ice melts.
(i) Explain why this ice melts.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

5
(ii) Describe how to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of ice using this experiment.
State any other measurements that the student needs to make.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a balloon inflated with air.
Fig. 3.1
The pressure of the air at the inner surface of the balloon keeps the rubber stretched.
(a) Explain, in terms of the momentum of the molecules, why there is a pressure at the inner
surface of the balloon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The volume of the air in the balloon is 630 cm3 and the pressure of the air in the balloon is
1.0 × 105 Pa.
The balloon is tied to a heavy stone and dropped into a lake. The balloon is pulled down
quickly and the temperature of the air inside does not change.
(i) Calculate the volume of the air when the pressure of the air is 1.4 × 105 Pa.
volume = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

7
(ii) The balloon and stone stop moving when the stone hits the bottom of the lake. The
temperature of the air now begins to decrease.
Explain why the volume of the air in the balloon decreases as the temperature decreases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

8
4 A train of mass 1.8 × 105 kg is at rest in a station. At time t = 0, the train begins to accelerate along
a straight, horizontal track and reaches a speed of 20 m / s at t = 15 s. The train continues at a
speed of 20 m / s for 10 s.
At t = 25 s, the driver applies the brakes and the resistive force on the train causes it to decelerate
uniformly to rest in a further 24 s.
Fig. 4.1 is an incomplete distance–time graph for this journey.
600
distance / m
400
200
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
t/s
Fig. 4.1
(a) Complete Fig. 4.1 by drawing:
(i) a line to represent the motion of the train between t = 15 s and t = 25 s [1]
(ii) a curve to represent the motion of the train between t = 0 and t = 15 s. [1]
(b) Calculate the kinetic energy of the train between t = 15 s and t = 25 s.
kinetic energy = .......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

9
(c) While the train decelerates to rest, it does work against the resistive force and its kinetic
energy decreases.
(i) Define work done.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Using Fig. 4.1, determine the distance moved by the train while it decelerates.
distance moved = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate the resultant force acting on the train while it decelerates.
resultant force = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

10
5 (a) Explain, in terms of the behaviour of light rays, what is meant by principal focus for a thin
converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State what is meant by focal length.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A lens is used to produce a focused image of an object on a translucent screen. Fig. 5.1
shows the object O and its image I.
translucent
screen
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 5.1
(i) Consider the straight ray that passes from the tip of O to the tip of I and find the position
of the lens. Mark the position of the lens by drawing a vertical line labelled L from the top
of the grid to the bottom. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, draw a ray that passes through one of the principal focuses and determine
the focal length of the lens.
focal length = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

11
R
(iii) Object O is a printed document that includes a large letter R on the side facing the lens.
The top edge of the document corresponds to the tip of O. Fig. 5.2 shows the printed
document.
R
R R
top edge
R
printed
document
Fig. 5.2 Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.3, mark a tick in one of the boxes ( ✓ ) to indicate how the image on the
translucent screen appears to someone who is looking at the screen from point P. Explain
why the image has this appearance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

12
6 X‑rays are electromagnetic waves. Fig. 6.1 shows the position of X‑rays in the electromagnetic
spectrum arranged according to increasing wavelength.
gamma-rays X-rays J K microwaves L
visible light
increasing wavelength
Fig. 6.1
(a) Three components of the spectrum are unnamed but labelled J, K and L.
(i) State the names of these three components.
J ........................................................................................................................................
K ........................................................................................................................................
L ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State which of these three components has the lowest frequency.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the frequency of X‑rays that have a wavelength of 1.2 × 10–9 m in a vacuum.
frequency = .......................................................... [3]
(c) (i) Describe one medical use of X‑rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21
13
(ii) State one reason why it is necessary to take safety precautions when X‑rays are used.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

15
7 A plastic rod becomes negatively charged when it is rubbed with a woollen cloth.
(a) Describe, in terms of particles, how the rod becomes negatively charged when rubbed with
the cloth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A light, conducting ball is at rest on a metal table. When the rod is brought close to the ball, as
shown in Fig. 7.1, the ball jumps up towards the rod.
rod
ball
metal table
Fig. 7.1
(i) Explain why the ball jumps up.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The ball touches the rod and falls back down to the table.
Explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

16
8 A circuit contains two fixed resistors and a light‑dependent resistor (LDR). Fig. 8.1 shows that the
power supply is a 9.0 V battery.
9.0 V
450 Ω
800 Ω
Fig. 8.1
The current in the 450 Ω resistor is 0.012 A.
(a) State what is meant by electric current.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The current in the LDR is I1 and the current in the 800 Ω resistor is I2.
Complete the equation that relates the current in the 450 Ω resistor to I1 and I2.
current in the 450 Ω resistor = ............................................................................................. [1]
(c) Calculate the power dissipated in the 800 Ω resistor.
power = .......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

17
(d) The brightness of the light that is incident on the LDR increases.
Explain what happens to the potential difference (p.d.) across the 450 Ω resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

19
9 Uranium‑235 (235
92U) is a radioactive isotope of uranium that occurs naturally on Earth.
(a) Describe the composition and structure of a neutral atom of uranium‑235.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Another isotope of uranium is uranium‑238.
Describe how an atom of uranium‑238 differs from an atom of uranium‑235.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) In the reactor in a nuclear power station, a nucleus of uranium‑235 absorbs a slow‑moving
neutron and then undergoes nuclear fission.
Two neutrons, a nucleus of xenon‑140 (140

54Xe) and a nucleus of an element represented by E
are produced.
Complete the equation for this fission reaction.
235U 140Xe
...........
n + 92 54 + ........... E + 2n
[2]
(d) Xenon‑140 (140

54Xe) is radioactive. It decays by β‑emission to isotope Q.
Determine:
(i) the proton number of Q ............................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the nucleon number of Q. ............................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/O/N/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 7 4 3 2 6 2 7 0 7 5 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (NF/SG) 214505/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a space rocket accelerating away from a launch pad.
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is a speed–time graph for the first 30 s of the rocket’s flight.
2000
speed
m/s
1500
1000
500
0
0 10 20 30
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) Describe how the acceleration of the rocket changes between time = 10 s and time = 30 s.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21

3
(b) By drawing a tangent to the graph, determine the acceleration of the rocket at time = 25 s.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the rocket between time = 0 and time = 10 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]

4
2 (a) State Hooke’s law.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows the extension–load graph for a spring.
200
extension / mm
100
0
0 10 20 30
load / N
Fig. 2.1
(i) On Fig. 2.1, mark and label the region where the spring obeys Hooke’s law. [1]
(ii) Calculate the spring constant k.
k = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) The original length of the spring is 120 mm.
Calculate the length of the spring when a load of 8.5 N is applied to the spring.
length = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21

5
(c) The weight of an object is 4.0 N on a planet where the acceleration of free fall is 8.7 m / s2.
Calculate the mass of the object.
mass = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a collision at very slow speed between two cars travelling along a straight road.
car B
car A
Fig. 3.1
Car B, of mass 800 kg, is moving at 2.0 m / s and collides with car A, of mass 1000 kg, which is
stationary. After the collision, both cars travel in the same direction as the initial direction of car B.
(a) After the collision, car A moves at 1.3 m / s.
Show that the speed of car B after the collision is approximately 0.4 m / s.
[3]
(b) (i) Calculate the impulse exerted by car A on car B.
impulse = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) State the impulse exerted by car B on car A.
impulse = ........................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21

7
4 (a) A power station uses wind energy to generate electricity.
State and explain whether this method of generating electricity is renewable.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two energy resources that do not have the Sun as their source.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) For each energy resource, state the form of energy stored in:
fossil fuels .................................................................................................................................
water behind hydroelectric dams. .............................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 6]

8
5 (a) A thermocouple thermometer is used to determine the temperature difference between a

mixture of ice and water and liquid mercury at approximately 600 °C.
Complete Fig. 5.1 with a labelled diagram to show how the thermocouple thermometer can
be used in this way.
mixture of liquid mercury

ice and water at approximately
600 °C
Fig. 5.1
[3]
(b) State two other physical properties that can be used to measure temperature.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two benefits of using a thermocouple thermometer instead of a liquid-in-glass

thermometer.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21

9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows particles of a material in which a sound wave is travelling.
(a) On Fig. 6.1, mark:
(i) the centre of a compression with the letter C [1]
(ii) the centre of a rarefaction with the letter R [1]
(iii) one wavelength with a double-ended arrow. [1]
(b) Circle one value from the list which is the speed of sound in water.
15 m / s 150 m / s 1500 m / s 15 000 m / s 150 000 m / s 1 500 000 m / s [1]
(c) The wavelength of a sound wave in water is 12 cm.
Calculate the frequency of this sound wave using your value from (b).
frequency = ........................................................ [3]
(d) State and explain whether the sound in (c) is ultrasound.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light approaching face AB of a glass prism of refractive index 1.5.
ray of
light
B C
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 7.1, accurately draw the path of the ray within the prism from face AB to face AC.
You will need to make a measurement from Fig. 7.1 and carry out a calculation.
[4]
(ii) Determine the angle of incidence of this ray when it strikes face AC.
angle = ........................................................ [1]
(b) Without further measurement or calculation, sketch on Fig. 7.1 the approximate path of the
ray after passing through the face AC. [1]
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows a ray of light travelling within an optical fibre.
ray of
light
optical fibre
X
Fig. 7.2
(i) Complete the path of the ray of light to the left-hand end of the fibre. [2]
(ii) Name the process taking place at X. .......................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21
11
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a conducting object A, initially uncharged, held on an insulating stand. The
positively charged rod B is brought close to object A.
charged rod B + conducting

+ object A
+
+
+ insulating stand
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw the distribution of charges on object A. [2]
(ii) A wire is connected from object A to earth.
State and explain any movement of charge.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) There is a current in a wire of 0.65 mA for 2.2 minutes.
Calculate the charge that flows.
charge = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21

13
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5 V and a battery of e.m.f. 6.0 V
connected in series.
1.5 V 6.0 V
Fig. 9.1
Calculate the combined e.m.f. of the cell and the battery.
e.m.f. = ........................................................ [1]
(b) The combined resistance of the three resistors shown in Fig. 9.2 is 4.4 Ω.
2.0 Ω
I R
3.0 Ω
Fig. 9.2
(i) Calculate the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) The current I in Fig. 9.2 is 0.94 A.
Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the combination of resistors.
p.d. = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]

14
10 (a) Name the logic gate shown in Fig. 10.1. ..............................................................
Fig. 10.1
[1]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a combination of logic gates.
input I output O
Fig. 10.2
Complete the right-hand column of Table 10.1, the truth table for the combination of logic
gates. You may use the blank column for your working.
Table 10.1
input I output O
1
[2]
(c) An electrical device has a metal case.
Explain the benefit of earthing the metal case.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Explain how a fuse protects a circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21

15
(ii) The current in an electric kettle connected to the mains through a fuse is 10 A.
Fuses with the following ratings are available.
3A 9A 10 A 13 A 30 A
Circle the correct fuse rating for this appliance and explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

16
11 (a) Describe the composition and structure of a neutral atom of beryllium-8, which has a proton
number of 4 and a nucleon number of 8.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A radioactive isotope decays by β-emission to form an isotope of barium with nucleon
number 135.
Table 11.1
element symbol proton number

iodine I 53
xenon Xe 54
caesium Cs 55
barium Ba 56
lanthanum La 57
cerium Ce 58
praseodymium Pr 59
Use data from Table 11.1 to write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/O/N/21

* 3 3 7 6 1 2 0 8 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/FC) 169310/4
2
1 A bus is travelling between points A and D. There are bus stops at A, B, C and D but the bus does
not stop at B and C. Fig. 1.1 is a speed-time graph for the bus.
B C
40
speed
km / h 30
20
10
A D
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion of the bus between each of the bus stops. Select the appropriate
description from the list below.
constant acceleration decreasing acceleration
increasing acceleration moving backwards at constant speed
moving forwards at constant speed stationary
1. between A and B ..............................................................................
2. between B and C ..............................................................................
3. between C and D .............................................................................

[3]
(b) The average speed of the bus between A and D is 23 km / h.
Calculate the distance between A and D.
distance = ........................................................ [3]
(c) The bus stops at D for 1 min and then travels at a constant acceleration for 30 seconds.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a possible graph for this additional motion. Label X when the bus starts to
accelerate and label Y for 30 seconds later. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a model fire engine. Its brakes are applied.
model fire engine

containing water tank
jet of water
FIRE
Fig. 2.1
0.80 kg of water is emitted in the jet every 6.0 s at a velocity of 0.72 m / s relative to the model.
(a) Calculate the change in momentum of the water that is ejected in 6.0 s.
momentum = ........................................................ [2]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the force acting on the model because of the jet of water.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) The brakes of the model are released.
State and explain the direction of the acceleration of the model.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) In (c) the model contains a water tank, which is initially full.
State and explain any change in the magnitude of the initial acceleration if the brakes are first
released when the tank is nearly empty.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows solar cells used to generate electrical energy.
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the main form of energy transferred from the Sun to the solar cells for the generation of
electrical energy.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Consider the generation of electrical energy by a large number of solar cells, as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
(i) State one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain whether this source of electrical energy is renewable.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

5
(c) Each group of solar cells is arranged in a rectangle 1.2 m × 2.8 m. The solar cells are situated
in a region where 260 W of solar energy is received per square metre of the cells. The
electrical output of each group of solar cells is a current of 2.5 A with a potential difference of
86 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the solar cells.
efficiency = .................................................... % [4]
[Total: 8]

6
4 (a) State and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of a gas when the
volume is reduced at a constant temperature.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Complete Table 4.1 to give the relative order of magnitude of the expansion of gases, liquids
and solids for the same increase of temperature.
Write one of these words in each blank space:
gas liquid solid
Table 4.1
expands most
expands least
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

7
5 (a) (i) A liquid is heated so that bubbles of its vapour rise to the surface and molecules escape
to the atmosphere.
State the name of this process .................................................................................... [1]
(ii) At a lower temperature than in (a)(i), molecules escape from the surface to the
atmosphere.
State the name of this process .................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus used to determine the power output of a heater.
thermometer
electric heater
metal block
Fig. 5.1
The metal block has a mass of 2.7 kg. The metal of the block has a specific heat capacity
of 900 J / (kg °C).
In 2 min 30 s, the temperature of the block increases from 21 °C to 39 °C.
Calculate the power of the heater.
power = ........................................................ [4]
(ii) State and explain a precaution that can be taken to improve the accuracy of the
experiment.
Statement ..........................................................................................................................
Explanation .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a water wave in a ripple tank.
new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
region B
region A
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave moves from region A to region B.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a cause for the change in direction of the wave.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

9
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a transverse wave.
displacement
0
time
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw a wave which has half the amplitude and a greater frequency than the wave
shown. [2]
(c) A train travels along steel rails. A person waiting at a station hears the sound of the train
through the rails before he hears the sound through the air.
(i) Explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The speed of sound in the rails is 5800 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of sound of frequency 1100 Hz travelling at this speed.
wavelength = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 7]

10
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, a converging lens projects a sharp image of an object O on to a screen.
Complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen.
converging lens
screen
Fig. 7.1 [2]
(b) The converging lens in (a) is replaced with a thinner converging lens. The object O and the
screen remain in the same positions as in (a). The thinner converging lens has a longer focal
length than the converging lens in (a).
Complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen in Fig. 7.2.
thinner converging lens

screen
Fig. 7.2 [2]
(c) A converging lens is used as a magnifying glass.

The focal length of the lens is 10 cm.
(i) Describe the position of the object in relation to the lens.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the position of the image in relation to the lens and the object.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give three properties of the image formed by a magnifying glass.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19
11
8 (a) A conducting sphere is mounted on an insulating stand. Explain how you would use a
positively charged rod of insulating material to charge the sphere by induction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows an electronic component.
Fig. 8.1
State the name of the component shown in Fig. 8.1 .......................................................... [1]
(c) In the space below, write down the truth table for a NAND gate.
[2]

12
(d) Fig. 8.2 shows the connections to two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 8.2
Table 8.1 shows part of the truth table for the arrangement of logic gates in Fig. 8.2.
Complete Table 8.1 for the input values shown.
Table 8.1
intermediate
inputs output
point
A B C D E
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

13
9 (a) Describe how to demagnetise a bar magnet using alternating current (a.c.) in a coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) motor.
d.c. power supply
split-ring
commutator
N S
coil
Fig. 9.1
(i) Explain the purpose of the split-ring commutator.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The voltage of the power supply is increased.
State the effect this has on the motor.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]

14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit containing a filament lamp of resistance 0.30 Ω and two resistors, each of
resistance 0.20 Ω.
0.20 Ω
0.20 Ω
0.30 Ω
Fig. 10.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of the lamp and the two resistors.
resistance = ........................................................ [3]
(b) The potential difference (p.d.) of the supply is increased so that the current in the lamp
increases.
State and explain any change in the resistance of the lamp.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

15
11 (a) A radon-222 nucleus contains 86 protons and 136 neutrons. It decays by emitting an
α-particle and becomes a nucleus of an isotope of polonium. The symbol for radon is Rn and
the symbol for polonium is Po.
Write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[3]
(b) Carbon-14 is radioactive with a half-life of 5700 years. An animal bone is dug up in an
archaeological excavation. The quantity of carbon-14 in the bone is 25% of what it was when
the bone was buried.
Calculate the time that has elapsed since it was buried.
time = .............................................. years [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

* 8 2 4 7 4 4 5 0 5 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (RW/SW) 169311/4
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

3
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a distance‑time graph for a cyclist travelling between points P and V on a straight
road.
800
distance / m
600
V
S T U
400
R
200
Q
P
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion between:
Q and R ....................................................................................................................................
R and S .....................................................................................................................................
S and T. .....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Calculate the speed between U and V.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(c) After point V, the straight road continues down a steep hill. The cyclist travels down the steep
hill. He does not apply the brakes and all resistive forces can be ignored.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a possible motion for the cyclist after V. [1]
[Total: 6]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is the top view of a small ship of mass 1.2 × 106 kg. The ship is moving slowly sideways at
0.040 m / s as it comes in to dock.
large wooden pillars
dock wall
small ship
0.040 m / s
Fig. 2.1
The ship hits the wooden pillars which move towards the dock wall.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the ship before it hits the pillars.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The ship is in contact with the pillars for 0.30 s as it comes to rest.
Calculate the average force exerted on the side of the ship.
force = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

5
(c) Assume that the kinetic energy calculated in (a) is used to do work moving the pillars.
Calculate the distance moved by the pillars.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(d) Dock walls sometimes have the pillars replaced with rubber car tyres.
Explain how this reduces the possibility of damage when a boat docks.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a small submarine submerged below the surface of the sea.
surface of the sea
sea
3.0 × 103 m water
submarine
Fig. 3.1
(a) The density of sea water is 1030 kg / m3.
Calculate the pressure due to the sea water on the top of the submarine when it is 3.0 × 103 m
below the surface.
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

7
(b) The submarine emits a pulse of sound to detect other objects in the sea. The speed of sound
in sea water is 1500 m / s. An echo is received with a time delay of 0.50 s after the original
sound is emitted.
(i) Calculate the distance between the submarine and the other object.
distance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Another pulse of sound is emitted through the air when the submarine is on the surface.
An echo is received from a second object that is in the air. This echo is received 0.50 s
after the pulse of sound is emitted.
Compare the distance of the second object from the submarine with the distance
calculated in (b)(i). Tick one box. Give a reason for your answer.
distance is smaller
distance is the same
distance is larger
Reason ........................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

8
4 (a) Water molecules escape to the atmosphere from water boiling in a pan. Water molecules
evaporate from the surface of a bowl of cool water and also escape to the atmosphere.
State two ways in which boiling is different from evaporation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a heater in a metal block.
thermometer
electric heater
metal block
Fig. 4.1
The power of the heater is 370 W and it is switched on for 4.0 minutes. The metal block has a
specific heat capacity of 420 J / (kg °C) and a mass of 5.0 kg.
Calculate the increase of temperature of the block. Assume all the thermal energy from the
heater is transferred to the block.
temperature increase = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

9
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a cross‑section of the inside of a vacuum flask containing a cold liquid. The walls of
the vacuum flask are made of glass.
stopper
silvered
surfaces
vacuum
glass
Fig. 5.1
(a) The vacuum flask is being used to keep a liquid cool on a hot day.
Explain how the labelled features of the vacuum flask keep the liquid cool by reducing thermal
energy transfer. Include the names of the processes involved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Suggest a suitable material for the stopper.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

10
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of a wave approaching a narrow gap and passing through the gap.
The wavelength is λ.
wavefronts gap barrier
direction of
travel
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes through the gap.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
λ
(ii) A wave with a wavelength approaches the same gap.
2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three wavefronts for this wave as it approaches the gap and three
more wavefronts as the wave continues beyond it. [3]
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

11
(b) Table 6.1 shows 5 different types of electromagnetic wave.
In the blank column in Table 6.1, write the numbers 1 to 5 to show the order of wavelength.
Write 1 for the wave with the shortest wavelength and 5 for the wave with the longest
wavelength. [2]
Table 6.1
type of electromagnetic wave order of wavelength

gamma rays
light
microwaves
ultraviolet
X‑rays
(c) (i) State the speed of radio waves in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A radio station transmits radio waves with a frequency of 96 MHz.

Calculate the wavelength of these radio waves.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

13
7 Fig. 7.1 shows light approaching a boundary between two materials at speed v. The speed of the
light after crossing the boundary is 1.3v.
light
50°
boundary
Fig. 7.1
(a) Determine the angle of incidence.
angle of incidence = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the angle of refraction.
[Total: 4]

14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a 240 V mains supply connected to an air‑conditioning unit and a freezer. A fuse X
is placed in the circuit as shown.
240 V
air-conditioning
mains freezer
unit
supply
Fig. 8.1
The freezer has an operating power of 700 W.
(a) Calculate the current in the freezer.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The maximum operating current of the air‑conditioning unit is 7.5 A.
Fuses of current rating 1 A, 3 A, 5 A, 10 A, 13 A and 30 A are available.
Suggest a suitable rating for fuse X. Give two reasons for your answer.
fuse rating .................................................................................................................................
Reason 1 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

15
(c) A fuse is made out of a short length of wire.
Explain why fuses of a higher rating are made of thicker wire.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Electrical energy can be obtained from renewable and non‑renewable sources of energy.
(i) State two renewable sources of energy.
Source 1 ........................................................
Source 2 ........................................................ [2]
(ii) State one social, economic or environmental disadvantage of one of your answers to
(d)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

16
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows an electrical component.
Fig. 9.1
State the name of the component shown in Fig. 9.1. ......................................................... [1]
(b) In the space below, write down the truth table for a NOR gate.
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

17
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the connections between two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1 for this combination of logic gates.
Table 9.1
inputs intermediate output

point
A B C D E
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
(d) Referring to a simple electron model, state what distinguishes electrical conductors from
electrical insulators.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

18
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simple alternating current generator.
rotation
of coil
coil
N S
P
output
Q
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced varies with
time for one revolution of the coil. Assume that the coil starts in the horizontal position, as
shown in Fig. 10.1.
Label the points on the time axis where the coil has completed 1/4 revolution and
3/4 revolution. [3]
e.m.f.
0
0 time
Fig. 10.2
(b) Explain why an e.m.f. is induced only when the coil is turning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

19
(c) State the name of the components labelled P and Q and state their purpose.
Name: .......................................................................................................................................
Purpose: ...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State two possible changes that cause a larger e.m.f. to be induced.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

20
11 (a) Americium (Am) is a radioactive isotope. A nucleus of americium contains 95 protons and
146 neutrons. It decays by emitting an α‑particle to form a nucleus of an isotope of neptunium
(Np).
Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of americium to neptunium.
[4]
(b) Ionisation smoke detectors contain americium and two small electrodes with a small voltage
between them. The air between the electrodes is ionised by α‑particles so that there is a
small electric current between the electrodes.
(i) Suggest and explain the effect of smoke on the current between the electrodes in the
smoke detector.
Suggestion: .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Explanation: ......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two reasons for using an α‑particle emitter in a smoke detector.
Reason 1 ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

* 4 7 0 2 7 0 2 2 7 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KS/TP) 169309/4
2
1 A rocket is stationary on the launchpad. At time t = 0, the rocket engines are switched on and
exhaust gases are ejected from the nozzles of the engines. The rocket accelerates upwards.
Fig. 1.1 shows how the acceleration of the rocket varies between time t = 0 and time t = tf.
acceleration
0
0 tf
time t
Fig. 1.1
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 1.2, sketch a graph to show how the speed of the rocket varies between time t = 0
and time t = tf.
speed
0
0 tf
time t
Fig. 1.2
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

3
(c) Some time later, the rocket is far from the Earth. The effect of the Earth’s gravity on the
motion of the rocket is insignificant. As the rocket accelerates, its momentum increases.
(i) State the principle of the conservation of momentum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the principle of the conservation of momentum applies to the accelerating
rocket and the exhaust gases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a sign that extends over a road.
support post
ACCIDENT
SLOW DOWN
sign
1.8 m
concrete
block W
1.3 m
P
70 cm
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the sign is 3.4 × 103 kg.
(a) Calculate the weight W of the sign.
W = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The weight of the sign acts at a horizontal distance of 1.8 m from the centre of the support
post and it produces a turning effect about point P.
Point P is a horizontal distance of 1.3 m from the centre of the support post.
(i) Calculate the moment about P due to the weight of the sign.
moment = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

5
(ii) A concrete block is positioned on the other side of the support post with its centre of
mass a horizontal distance of 70 cm from the centre of the support post.
1. State what is meant by centre of mass.
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. The weight of the concrete block produces a moment about point P that exactly
cancels the moment caused by the weight W.
Calculate the weight of the concrete block.
weight = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The concrete block is removed. The sign and support post rotate about point P in a clockwise
direction.
State and explain what happens to the moment about point P due to the weight of the sign as
it rotates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

6
3 A cube of side 0.040 m is floating in a container of liquid. Fig. 3.1 shows that the surface of the
liquid is 0.028 m above the level of the bottom face of the cube.
air
cube 0.040 m
liquid
0.028 m
valve
pump
Fig. 3.1
The pressure of the air above the cube exerts a force on the top face of the cube. The valve is
closed.
(a) Explain, in terms of air molecules, how the force due to the pressure of the air is produced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The density of the liquid in the container is 1500 kg / m3.
Calculate:
(i) the pressure due to the liquid at a depth of 0.028 m
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the force on the bottom face of the cube caused by the pressure due to the liquid.
force = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

7
(c) The valve is opened and liquid is pumped into the container. The surface of the liquid rises a
distance of 0.034 m.
The cube remains floating in the liquid with its bottom face 0.028 m below the surface of the
liquid.
(i) Calculate the work done on the cube by the force in (b)(ii).
work done = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why this is not an efficient method of lifting up the cube.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

8
4 Gas of mass 0.23 g is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The gas is at atmospheric pressure which
is 1.0 × 105 Pa. Fig. 4.1 shows the piston held in position by a catch.
gas cylinder
air at atmospheric
pressure
piston
heater catch
Fig. 4.1
The volume of the trapped gas is 1.9 × 10–4 m3.
An electrical heater is used to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550 °C.
(a) The specific heat capacity of the gas is 0.72 J / (g °C).
(i) Calculate the energy required to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The power of the heater is 2.4 W.
1. Calculate how long it takes for the heater to supply the energy calculated in (a)(i).
time = ......................................................... [2]
2. In practice, it takes much longer to increase the temperature of the gas by 550 °C
using the heater.
Suggest one reason for this.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

9
(b) When the temperature of the gas has increased by 550 °C, its pressure is 2.9 × 105 Pa. The
catch is then released allowing the piston to move. As the piston moves, the temperature of
the gas remains constant.
(i) State and explain what happens to the piston.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Determine the volume of the gas when the piston stops moving.
volume = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

10
5 Liquids and gases are two states of matter.
(a) In both boiling and evaporation, a liquid changes into a gas.
(i) State two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Before injecting a patient, a doctor wipes a small amount of a volatile liquid on to the
patient’s skin.
Explain, in terms of molecules, how this procedure cools the patient’s skin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Gases can be compressed but liquids are incompressible.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are incompressible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

11
BLANK PAGE

12
6 Green light of frequency 5.7 × 1014 Hz is travelling in air at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s. The light is
incident on the surface of a transparent solid.
Fig. 6.1 shows the wavefronts and the direction of travel of the light in the air.
wavefront
air
solid
Fig. 6.1
The light travels more slowly in the transparent solid.
(a) Explain, in terms of the wavefronts, why the light changes direction as it enters the solid. You
may draw on Fig. 6.1 as part of your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The refractive index of the transparent solid is 1.3.
(i) The light is incident on the surface of the solid at an angle of incidence of 67°.
Calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the solid.
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

13
(ii) Determine the wavelength of the green light in the transparent solid.
wavelength = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 9]

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit diagram that includes component X.
A
X
20 Ω
30 Ω
Fig. 7.1
(a) State the name of component X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is E. The switch is closed.
The potential difference (p.d.) across the 30 Ω resistor is V30.

The p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor is V20.
The p.d. across component X is VX.
State an equation that relates VX to:
(i) V30
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) E and V20.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

15
(c) The e.m.f. of the battery is 6.0 V and the resistance of component X is 15 Ω.
Calculate:
(i) the total resistance of the circuit
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) the ammeter reading.
reading = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The temperature of component X increases.
State and explain what happens to the ammeter reading.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

16
8 A student turns the handle of an alternating current (a.c.) generator and the coil rotates.
Fig. 8.1 represents the structure of the a.c. generator.
handle
coil
N S
slip rings
coil
voltage
output
brush
Fig. 8.1
(a) There is an alternating voltage output between the two terminals.
(i) Explain why rotating the coil produces an output voltage.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State the position of the rotating coil when the alternating output voltage is at a maximum
value and explain why the maximum output occurs at this position.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

17
(b) A lamp and an open switch are connected in series to the output terminals of the a.c.
generator.
The switch is closed and the lamp lights up. The student has to apply a greater force on the
handle.
Explain why a greater force is needed to keep the lamp lit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

18
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of α-particles moving towards a thin sheet of gold in a vacuum.
gold sheet
beam of α-particles
detectors
vacuum
Fig. 9.1
Detectors in the region surrounding the thin gold sheet detect the α-particles and determine
the number of particles that travel in various directions.
State and explain what can be deduced from the following observations.
(i) The majority of the α-particles pass through the gold sheet undeflected and are detected
on the far side.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) A small number of α-particles are deflected as they pass through the gold sheet.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) A very small number of α-particles are deflected through very large angles or return back
the way they came.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

19
(b) A beam that consists of both α-particles and β-particles is passed through a region of space
where there is a magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of the beam.
State two ways in which the deflection of the α-particles differs from that of the β-particles.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 1 7 2 8 4 2 2 4 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/CGW) 196162/3
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a trolley travelling down a ramp.
tape
trolley
P ramp
Fig. 1.1
The trolley has a piece of paper tape attached to it. The tape passes through a machine
which makes a dot on the tape every 0.02 s.
Fig. 1.2 shows a section of the tape.
Fig. 1.2
(i) State how the dots on the tape show that the trolley was moving with constant speed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When the trolley reaches the point P, the ramp is tilted so that the angle x is greater.
Describe and explain the change in motion of the trolley.
description .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

3
(b) Another trolley is released from the top of the ramp.
Fig. 1.3 shows the speed–time graph for this trolley.
1.5
speed
m/s
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5
time / s
Fig. 1.3
Using Fig. 1.3, calculate the distance travelled by the trolley in the first 0.5 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]

4
(c) Fig. 1.4 shows a metal ball at rest in a tube of liquid.
metal ball
X
liquid
tube
Fig. 1.4
The ball is released and reaches terminal velocity at point X.
Explain the motion of the ball as it falls from rest until it reaches point X.
Use ideas of force and acceleration in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

5
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a cliff edge with water below it.
ball
cliff
115 m
water
Fig. 2.1
A ball falls over the edge of the cliff. The mass of the ball is 160 g. The height of the cliff is 115 m.
(a) Calculate the vertical speed of the ball as it hits the water. Air resistance can be ignored.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the vertical momentum of the ball as it hits the water.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]

6
3 (a) (i) Speed is a scalar quantity.
State one other scalar quantity.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Velocity is a vector quantity.
State one other vector quantity.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a model car travelling at constant speed on a flat circular track.
car
circular
track
Fig. 3.1
The speed of the car is 0.30 m / s. In one complete revolution around the track, the car travels
3.9 m.
(i) Calculate the time taken for the car to complete one revolution around the track.
time = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

7
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, draw and label with the letter F an arrow to show the resultant force acting
on the car. [1]
(iii) The speed of the car increases and at point P on Fig. 3.2 the car does not stay on the
track.
Fig. 3.2
1. Suggest, in terms of the force acting on the car, why the car does not stay on the track
at point P.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. On Fig. 3.2, draw and label an arrow with the letter S to show the direction of motion of
the car as it leaves the track at point P. [1]
[Total: 7]

8
4 In Fig. 4.1, the circles represent molecules in different states of matter.
A B C
Fig. 4.1
(a) Identify the states A, B and C.
A ………………………………………………………..
B ………………………………………………………..
C ………………………………………………………..
[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of forces between molecules, why gases expand more than liquids when
they have the same rise in temperature. Assume that the pressure remains constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a cylinder and piston.
cylinder
piston
gas
Fig. 4.2
The volume of gas in the cylinder is 3400 cm3. The pressure of the gas in the cylinder is
0.90 × 105 Pa.
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

9
(i) The piston is moved to the left and fixed in a new position. The pressure of the gas in
the cylinder increases to 2.5 × 105 Pa. Assume that the temperature of the gas does not
change.
Calculate the new volume of the gas.
volume = .......................................................... [3]
(ii) The gas in the cylinder is now heated. The piston remains fixed in the same position as
in (c)(i).
State and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of the gas.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows two metal plates A and B with a radiant heater placed midway between them.
shiny plate dull black plate
wax wax
cork cork
A B
radiant heater
Fig. 5.1
Metal plate A is shiny. Metal plate B is dull black. A piece of cork is attached to each plate using
wax. The wax is a solid at room temperature and has a melting point of 37 °C.
(a) State and explain what happens to the pieces of cork a few minutes after the heater is
switched on.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Give the name of the method of transfer of thermal energy in solid metals.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

11
6 (a) Sound waves consist of compressions and rarefactions.
Explain the terms compression and rarefaction. Give your explanation in terms of the spacing
of molecules and the pressure for sound waves in air.
compression .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A musical instrument emits a sound with a frequency of 4.4 kHz. The speed of sound in air is
340 m / s.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of the sound.
wavelength = .......................................................... [3]
(ii) The frequency of the sound emitted by the instrument is changed to 5.1 kHz and the
amplitude of the sound is increased.
Without calculation, state what happens to
1. the speed of the sound ..................................................................................................
2. the wavelength of the sound .........................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 8]

12
7 (a) State two uses for infrared radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) X-rays are used in hospitals to help treat patients.
Suggest and explain three precautions for the safe use of X-rays.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) (i) State the speed in a vacuum of
1. microwaves ............................................................................................................. [1]
2. X-rays .................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State a possible frequency for an ultrasound wave.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

13
8 (a) (i) Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit. The resistor has a resistance of 4.0 Ω. The reading on
the voltmeter is 3.0 V.
Fig. 8.1
Calculate the current in the resistor.
current = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) Fig. 8.2 shows the same circuit with one component reversed.
Fig. 8.2
State the reading on the voltmeter and explain your answer.
reading = ...............................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

14
(b) Fig. 8.3 shows the symbol for a logic gate.
X
Z
Y
Fig. 8.3
The truth table for this logic gate is shown in Table 8.1.
Table 8.1
input X input Y output Z

0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
State the name of this logic gate. …………………………………………….. [1]
(c) (i) A student designs the circuit shown in Fig. 8.4.
A C
B
E
Fig. 8.4
Complete the truth table for this circuit in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2
A B C D E
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[3]
(ii) A single logic gate can be used to produce output E in Fig. 8.4 with the inputs A and B
shown in Table 8.2.
State the name of this logic gate. ………………………………………. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20
15
9 (a) Electrical power is produced in a power station by an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
The output of the generator has a voltage of 22 000 V. The electrical power is transmitted at a
voltage of 400 000 V.
Explain why electrical power is transmitted at a voltage of 400 000 V and not 22 000 V.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A computer contains a transformer.
The input voltage to the transformer is 240 V. The output voltage from the transformer is 20 V
and the output current is 2.3 A.
The efficiency of the transformer is 90%.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
current = .......................................................... [5]
[Total: 8]

16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a relay.
circuit
B
contacts pivot
M
soft-iron
armature
circuit
A
Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch in circuit A is closed. Describe how this operates the motor in circuit B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The switch in circuit A is opened. The soft-iron armature is replaced with a steel armature.
The switch in circuit A is closed.
Explain what happens when the switch in circuit A is then opened.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

17
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays directed between two metal
plates P and Q.
P + + + + + + + +
beam of
α-particles, β-particles
and γ-rays
Q – – – – – – – –
Fig. 11.1
The metal plates are parallel and there is a large potential difference (p.d.) between them.
Plate P is positive and plate Q is negative.
On Fig. 11.1, draw the paths of each of the radiations between the plates and after leaving
the plates.
Label the paths α, β and γ. [5]
(b) State and explain one practical application of γ-rays.
application ................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 8 0 7 6 7 8 9 1 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/CGW) 196149/3
2
1 A sky-diver jumps out of a hot-air balloon, which is 4000 m above the ground. At time = 30 s, she
opens her parachute.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph of her fall.
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
4.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Label with the letter X the point on the graph where the sky-diver opens her parachute.
[1]
(ii) Label with the letters Y and Z the two parts of the graph where the sky-diver falls at
terminal velocity. [1]
(b) Describe, in terms of the forces acting on the sky-diver, her motion between leaving the
balloon and opening her parachute.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Calculate the average speed of the sky-diver in the first 4.0 s of her fall.
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20
3
2 (a) Define the moment of a force about a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform rod of wood suspended from a pivot.
0.25 m
pivot
34°
centre of mass
0.75 m
rod of wood
W
F
The rod is held stationary by a horizontal force F acting as shown.

The mass of the rod is 0.080 kg.
Calculate:
(i) the weight W of the rod
weight = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) the moment of W about the pivot
moment = .......................................................... [2]
(iii) the moment of F about the pivot
moment = .......................................................... [1]
(iv) the force F.
force = .......................................................... [2]

4
(c) The angle between the rod and the vertical is increased.
State whether the force F needed to hold the rod stationary must be increased, decreased or
stay the same.
Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

5
3 The kinetic energy of air passing through a wind turbine every minute is 720 000 J. The electrical
output of the turbine is 9.0 A at a potential difference (p.d.) of 240 V.
Calculate the efficiency (%) of the wind turbine.
efficiency = ...................................................... % [5]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a thermometer.
wire of V wire of
material A material A
ice
cubes
wire of
material B
water at 0 °C water at 100 °C
Fig. 4.1
The voltmeter reading is 5.4 mV.
(a) State the name of this type of thermometer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the same thermometer used to measure the temperature of liquid X.
liquid X
water at 20 °C
Fig. 4.2
With the setup in Fig. 4.2, the voltmeter reading is 1.7 mV.
Calculate the temperature of liquid X measured by the thermometer.
temperature = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

7
(c) Suggest an application for which this type of thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-in-
glass thermometer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]

8
5 (a) (i) Define specific latent heat.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain the melting of a solid in terms of molecules and energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An electrical heater is used to heat a liquid to its boiling point. Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus.
connecting
liquid
wires
heater element container
balance 3800 g
Fig. 5.1
When the liquid is boiling, the heater supplies 1.26 MJ of thermal energy. The mass reading
shown on the balance decreases from 3800 g to 2300 g.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of the liquid.
specific latent heat = ......................................................... [3]
(c) State and explain a precaution to improve the accuracy of the value of specific latent heat
calculated in (b).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20
9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a transverse wave produced in a string.
string
Fig. 6.1 (full size)
(a) On Fig. 6.1:
(i) draw labelled lines to show
1. the amplitude of the wave
2. the wavelength of the wave

[2]
(ii) label a trough with the letter T. [1]
(b) A person vibrates one end of the string vertically to produce the wave. He makes 15 complete
oscillations in 60 s.
Show that the speed of the wave is 2.0 cm / s.
[3]
(c) State the difference between transverse waves and longitudinal waves. Use your ideas about
the direction of oscillations.
transverse waves ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
longitudinal waves ....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light passing through an optical fibre.
i Q
Fig. 7.1
The optical fibre is made of glass that has a refractive index of 1.4.
(a) (i) No light refracts from the fibre at points P and Q.
State the name of the process that occurs at P and Q.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the minimum value of angle i for there to be no refraction at point P.
angle = .......................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain the use of optical fibres in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The ray of light shown in Fig. 7.1 is monochromatic light from a laser.
State what is meant by monochromatic light. Use one of the following quantities in your answer.
amplitude brightness frequency refractive index speed
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

11
8 (a) State and explain why electrical sockets and plugs used outside in a garden need to be
different from those that can be used safely in a room inside a house.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State and explain why fuses and circuit breakers are installed in electrical circuits connected
to the mains supply.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 4]

12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a bar magnet and four plotting compasses A, B, C and D.
C A
bar magnet
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1:
(i) draw an arrow on each of the three plotting compasses B, C and D to show the direction
of the magnetic field [2]
(ii) label the magnetic poles of the bar magnet N and S. [1]
(b) Describe one method for demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

13
(c) Fig. 9.2 represents a current in a wire. The current is into the plane of the paper.
(i) Draw the pattern of the magnetic field produced around the wire. Show clearly the
direction of the magnetic field.
Fig. 9.2
[2]
(ii) The direction of the current in the wire is reversed. The magnitude of the current is
unchanged.
State the effect that reversing the current has on the magnetic field produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows an incomplete electrical circuit.
2.0 Ω C D
A B 6.0 Ω
E F
4.0 Ω
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) A student completes the circuit and measures the current in the 6.0 Ω resistor.
On Fig. 10.1, draw an ammeter symbol in one gap and straight lines to indicate wires in
the other gaps to show how the student should do this. [1]
(ii) A voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0 Ω
resistor.
On Fig. 10.1, draw a voltmeter symbol connected in the correct position. [2]
(iii) With the circuit completed, the current in the 2.0 Ω resistor is 2.5 A.
Calculate the current in the 6.0 Ω resistor.
current = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same electrical circuit with an alternating current (a.c.) power supply and
a wire in the gap AB.
2.0 Ω C D
A B 6.0 Ω
E F
4.0 Ω
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, draw a diode symbol in one gap and a straight line to indicate a wire in the other
gap so that there is a current from right to left in the 4.0 Ω resistor and an alternating current
in the 2.0 Ω resistor. [2]
[Total: 9]

16
11 (a) State two differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Radioactive tracers emitting γ-rays can be used in medicine. The half-life of the source of
these γ-rays is 6 hours.
(i) Explain why a source of γ-rays used in this way should not have a half-life shorter or
longer than about 6 hours.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Technetium-99 is a source of γ-rays often used as a radioactive tracer. It is produced

from molybdenum-99 which emits β-particles. The symbol for technetium is Tc and the
symbol for molybdenum is Mo.
Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
99
..... .....
42 Mo ..... Tc + ..... β
[3]
(iii) Technetium-99 is a radioactive nuclide.
State another use of radioactive nuclides in medicine.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 0 8 1 8 7 0 4 3 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/CGW) 196148/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows an ice-hockey player moving on ice. He is preparing to hit the solid disc called a
puck.
ice-hockey player
ice
hockey stick
disc
Fig. 1.1
The disc of mass 0.16 kg is moving horizontally across the surface of the ice at a speed of 15 m / s.
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the momentum of the disc.
magnitude of momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The hockey player strikes the disc with his hockey stick and the momentum of the disc
changes. The disc gains momentum of 3.0 kg m / s at 45° to the original direction of travel of
the disc, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
direction of
disc momentum gained
45°
original direction of travel
Fig. 1.2 (view from above)
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

3
(i) State the magnitude of the impulse exerted on the disc and the direction, in degrees, of
the impulse relative to the original direction of travel.
magnitude of impulse = ...............................................................
direction of impulse: ............................ ° to original direction

[1]
(ii) Determine the magnitude of the new momentum of the disc and its new direction relative
to the original direction of travel by drawing a scale diagram.
magnitude of new momentum = ...............................................................
direction of new momentum: ........................... ° to original direction

[4]
[Total: 7]
4
2 A vertical tube contains a liquid. A metal ball is held at rest by a thread just below the surface of
the liquid, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
thread
metal ball
tube
liquid
The diameter of the tube is much greater than the diameter of the ball. The ball is released and it
accelerates downwards uniformly for a short period of time.
(a) Describe what happens to the velocity of the ball in the short period of time as it accelerates
downwards uniformly.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The ball reaches terminal velocity.
Describe and explain the motion of the ball from when it is released until it reaches terminal
velocity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

5
(c) The metal ball has a mass of 2.1 g. It falls a distance of 0.80 m between being released and
reaching the bottom of the tube.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy transferred from the ball as it falls.
gravitational potential energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) When the ball reaches the bottom of the tube, it has a speed of 1.2 m / s. Calculate the
kinetic energy of the ball at the bottom of the tube.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why the value calculated in (c)(i) is different from that calculated in (c)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

6
3 A U-shaped tube of constant cross-sectional area contains water of density 1000 kg / m3. Both
sides of the U-tube are open to the atmosphere.
Fig. 3.1 shows that the water levels in the two sides of the tube are equal.
rubber tubing
connected to gas
supply
stopper
0.200 m
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
The atmospheric pressure is 1.00 × 105 Pa.
The left-hand side of the tube is now connected to a gas supply using a length of rubber tubing.
This causes the level of the water in the left-hand side of the tube to drop by 0.200 m, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
(a) Calculate the pressure of the gas supply. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

7
(b) Fig. 3.3 shows that the gas supply is now connected to a cylinder that contains a piston.
cylinder
open to the
rubber tubing atmosphere
connected to
gas supply
piston
Fig. 3.3
The pressure of the gas moves the piston to the right.
(i) The area of the piston in contact with the gas is 0.025 m2.
Calculate the resultant force on the piston.
resultant force = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The pressure of the gas causes the piston to move a distance of 0.50 m to the right.
Calculate the work done by the gas from the supply on the piston.
work done = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

8
4 A large test-tube contains a liquid at room temperature. An electric heater is immersed in the liquid
and is switched on. Thermal energy is supplied to the liquid by the heater. The temperature of the
liquid increases until it reaches its boiling point. The liquid then starts to change into gas.
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules and their motion, how a liquid differs from a gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Describe what happens to molecules of the liquid as its temperature begins to increase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) (i) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a supply of thermal energy is needed to change the
liquid into a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The density of the liquid in the test-tube is 0.86 g / cm3. The volume of liquid in the test-
tube is 50 cm3.
The liquid reaches its boiling point. It now absorbs 18 000 J of thermal energy and all of
the liquid changes into a gas.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of this liquid.
specific latent heat = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

9
5 A metal container is used to cook food. The metal container has thick walls. Hot cooking oil at a
temperature of 120 °C is poured into the container.
(a) The outside surface of the container gets hot. Some thermal energy passes through the metal
because vibrating atoms in the metal collide with neighbouring atoms and transfer energy to
them.
Explain how the rest of the thermal energy is conducted through the metal container to the
outside surface by another process.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The outside surface of the container is brightly polished and shiny.
Explain how this reduces the power that needs to be supplied to keep the oil at the correct
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The metal container is spherical. The spherical container has a smaller surface area than a
long, thin container of the same volume.
Explain the advantage of using a spherical container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

10
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a shallow tank viewed from above. The depth of the water is different in the two
parts of the tank. Fig. 6.1 shows the crests and the troughs of a wave that pass from left to right.
boundary
45°
Key
trough
crest
33°
2.6 cm
As the wave passes from one side to the other, the direction of the wavefronts changes.
(a) Explain why the direction of the wavefronts changes in the way shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The speed of the wave in the left-hand part of the tank is 0.39 m / s.
(i) Using information from Fig. 6.1, determine the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

11
(ii) Determine the speed of the wave in the right-hand side of the tank.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

12
7 (a) A permanent magnet is made from only one material.
Underline the material from which it is possible to make a permanent magnet. [1]
aluminium copper soft iron mercury plastic steel uranium
(b) An electron source produces a narrow beam of electrons that all travel at the same speed.
The electron source is placed in a vacuum and the beam of electrons travels vertically
downwards. Fig. 7.1 shows the beam of electrons before it passes between the N-pole and
the S-pole of a magnet.
electron source
beam of electrons
N-pole S-pole
Fig. 7.1
(i) Describe what is meant by the direction of a magnetic field. State the direction of the
magnetic field between the two poles in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

13
(ii) Describe and explain what happens to the beam of electrons in the magnetic field
between the poles of the magnet in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) A beam consists of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays.
Explain how a uniform magnetic field may be used to separate the α-particles, the β-particles
and the γ-rays.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

14
8 (a) Explain what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An electric heater contains two heating elements R1 and R2. An electric motor operates a fan.
The fan blows cool air over the heating elements.
Fig. 8.1 shows the circuit.
S1 S2 S3
240 V mains
supply M
R1 R2
Fig. 8.1
The heater is powered by a mains supply of e.m.f. 240 V.
Switches S1 and S2 are closed. Heating element R1 gets hot. The resistance of R1 is 30 Ω.
(i) Calculate the current in heating element R1.
current = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the power produced in heating element R1.
power = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) The resistance of heating element R2 is 60 Ω.
Switches S1, S2 and S3 are closed.
1. State and explain how the current in R2 compares with the current in R1.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

15
2. The current in the motor is 0.10 A. The cable from the electric heater to the plug for
the mains socket is safe when the current in it is less than 20 A.
Suggest and explain a suitable fuse rating for this circuit.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

16
9 (a) (i) Describe what is observed during total internal reflection.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two conditions required for light to be totally internally reflected.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Describe and explain the action of optical fibres in communication technology. You may draw
a diagram in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

17
10 A radiation detector is placed on the bench in a laboratory. It detects a background count rate of
40 counts / minute.
(a) State what is meant by background radiation. Suggest one source for it.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A sample containing atoms of the radioactive isotope polonium-208 is removed from a
lead container and brought close to the detector. The average count rate increases to
890 counts / minute.
When two sheets of paper are inserted between the sample and the detector, the average
count rate returns to 40 counts / minute.
Polonium-208 is represented by the symbol 208

84Po. It decays to an isotope of lead (Pb).
(i) Deduce the type of radiation emitted by polonium-208. Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of polonium-208.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 2 0 5 6 1 2 3 3 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (RW/JG) 301888/3
2
1 A battery provides energy to an electric car.
(a) The electric car has an acceleration of 2.9 m / s2 when it moves from rest.
The combined mass of the car and its driver is 1600 kg.
(i) Calculate the time taken to reach a speed of 28 m / s.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the force required to produce this acceleration.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Calculate the kinetic energy of the car when its speed is 28 m / s.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The time taken for the car battery to be recharged from zero charge to full charge is 8.3 h.
The charge is delivered to the battery by a charger with a current of 32 A.
Calculate the charge supplied by the charger.
charge = ......................................................... [3]
(c) Under ideal conditions, the car can travel a maximum distance of 390 km when the battery is
fully charged.
Suggest why, in normal use, the car needs to be recharged after travelling less than 390 km.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22

3
2 Water is held behind a dam in a hydroelectric power scheme.
(a) State the main form of energy stored in the water behind the dam.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The water is released from the dam and falls a vertical height of 410 m at a rate of 480 kg / s.
(i) Calculate the rate at which energy is transferred by the falling water.
rate of energy transfer = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) The power scheme supplies a current of 270 A at a voltage of 6000 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the power scheme.
efficiency = ......................................................% [3]
(c) Hydroelectric energy is a renewable form of energy.
(i) State one disadvantage of hydroelectric power schemes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one other renewable source of energy.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

4
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows a boat stored in a shed. The boat is suspended from the ceiling of the shed by
two ropes.
ceiling
60° 60°
ropes
T T
boat
Fig. 3.1
The tension T in each of the ropes is 75 N.
(i) Draw a vector diagram to determine the resultant of the forces exerted by the two ropes
on the boat. State the scale you used.
scale = ...............................................................
magnitude of resultant force = ...............................................................
direction of resultant force = ......................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22
5
(ii) Determine the mass of the boat.
mass = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Force is a vector.
Draw a circle around two other quantities in the list which are vectors.
acceleration density energy mass
momentum power refractive index

[2]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus used to observe the motion of smoke particles (Brownian motion).
microscope
glass cover
smoke glass cell
Fig. 4.1
The glass cell has light shining on it from the side.
The smoke particles are seen as bright specks of light when looking through the microscope.
(i) Draw the path of one of the bright specks of light.
[2]
(ii) Explain, in terms of forces and the motion of air molecules, the cause of the motion of
the smoke particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The temperature of the air in a sealed glass container is increased.
(i) Explain, in terms of molecules, why the internal energy of the air increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the air also increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22
7
5 (a) Define specific heat capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A bowl contains 500 cm3 of water at a temperature of 5.0 °C. The bowl of water is placed in
a freezer for several hours. When the bowl is removed from the freezer, it contains ice at a
temperature of –18.0 °C. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the mass of water in the bowl when it is placed in the freezer.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C). The specific heat capacity of ice is
2100 J / (kg °C). The specific latent heat of fusion of water is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate the energy given out as the water cools from 5.0 °C to ice at –18.0 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [5]
[Total: 9]

8
6 (a) (i) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a plane water wave approaching a barrier with a gap.
crests barrier
direction of travel
of water wave
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw three crests of the water wave to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows crests of a plane water wave in deep water approaching a region of
shallow water.
boundary
direction of travel
of water wave
deep shallow
water water
Fig. 6.2
The water wave moves more slowly in shallow water.
On Fig. 6.2, draw:
1. three crests of the water wave in the shallow water [2]
2. the direction of travel of the wave in the shallow water. [1]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22

9
(b) State two ways in which transverse waves differ from longitudinal waves.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) (i) State a typical value of the speed of sound in water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why sound travels faster in water than in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a plan view of a room. There is a plane mirror on one wall and a picture across
the whole of wall AB.
plane mirror
A
X
B
Fig. 7.1 (plan view)
A person is standing at point X and is looking at the mirror. The person cannot see all of the
picture on wall AB reflected in the mirror.
There is a point P on wall AB which is the closest point to A that the person can see reflected
in the mirror.
On Fig. 7.1, draw a reflected ray and an incident ray to show the position of the point P. [2]
(b) State two properties of the image formed by the mirror.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Visible light is an electromagnetic wave.
State the name of one region of the electromagnetic spectrum in which the waves have:
(i) shorter wavelengths than visible light
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) longer wavelengths than visible light.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22

11
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.
Fig. 8.1
(i) State the name of component X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) across component Y is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for the voltmeter and its connections to the circuit. [1]
(iii) The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is 12 V.
Component Y has a resistance of 400 Ω.
In a brightly lit room, the resistance of component X is 350 Ω.
1. Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ......................................................... [2]
2. Calculate the p.d. across component Y.
p.d. = ......................................................... [1]
(iv) In a dark room, the resistance of component X is very large.
State the effect this will have on the p.d. across component Y.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Suggest a practical use for component X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a magnet on the end of a spring and a coil of wire connected to a sensitive
centre-zero galvanometer. The magnet can move freely through the coil.
spring
coil of wire
N
centre-zero
galvanometer
Fig. 9.1
(i) The magnet is pulled down and released.
Describe and explain what happens to the needle of the sensitive galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii) The magnet is replaced with a stronger magnet.
State the effect of using a stronger magnet on what happens to the needle of the
galvanometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22

13
(b) A step-up transformer is used to step up the output voltage of a power station from 25 000 V
to 400 000 V for transmission along power lines.
The number of turns on the secondary coil is 36 000.
Calculate the number of turns on the primary coil.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

14
10 A student places a sample of an isotope of protactinium (Pa-234) near a radiation detector.

The readings on the detector, taken every 20 s, are recorded in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1
count rate
time / s
counts / min
0 101
20 88
40 76
60 66
80 58
100 51
120 46
140 42
160 38
180 35
Fig. 10.1 shows a graph of the count rate due to this sample against time.
80
count rate
counts / min
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
time / s
Fig. 10.1
(a) Explain why the readings in Table 10.1 are not the same as those plotted on the graph.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22

15
(b) Using the graph in Fig. 10.1, determine the half-life of this isotope of protactinium.
half-life = ....................................................... s [2]
234
(c) The nuclide notation for this isotope of protactinium is 91Pa.
Protactinium-234 decays to an isotope of uranium (U) by β-emission.
Write down the nuclide equation for this decay of protactinium-234.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22

16
BLANK PAGE
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/M/J/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 2 9 6 1 5 9 9 1 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (KS/FC) 301887/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows an electrically powered bicycle.
battery
electric motor
Fig. 1.1
When fully charged, the battery can deliver a power of 600 W for 60 min.
(a) (i) Calculate the energy, in joules, stored in the battery when fully charged.
energy = ...................................................... J [3]
(ii) State the form of energy stored by the battery.
......................................................... [1]
(b) The bicycle has a motor with an electrical input power of 250 W.
Calculate the time for which the battery can power the bicycle.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Consider this bicycle compared to a small motorcycle.
State two environmental benefits of the electrically powered bicycle.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an object of mass 2.0 kg on a bench. This object is connected by a cord, passing
over a pulley, to an object of mass 3.0 kg.
card
cord
pulley 2.0 cm 2.0 kg object
F
bench
3.0 kg object
Fig. 2.1
The 2.0 kg object is released from rest and accelerates at 4.0 m / s2.
(a) Calculate the resultant force acting on the 2.0 kg object.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the upward force F exerted by the cord on the 3.0 kg object.
force F = ......................................................... [3]
(c) The objects have a constant acceleration.
(i) Show that the speed of the objects 0.80 s after release is 3.2 m / s.
[2]
(ii) A card, of width 2.0 cm, is fixed to the 2.0 kg object. As the 2.0 kg object moves to the left,
the card passes through a beam of light that is perpendicular to the card.
Using the speed given in (c)(i), calculate the time taken for the card to pass through the
beam of light.
time = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
4
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows water in a river moving parallel to the river bank at 4.0 m / s and a canoe
travelling in the river.
river bank
canoe travels at 2.5 m / s

38° relative to the water
water moving at 4.0 m / s
river bank
Fig. 3.1
The canoe travels at 2.5 m / s relative to the water and heads at an angle of 38° to the river
bank.
Draw a scale diagram to determine the canoe’s resultant velocity and state the scale you
used.
scale ...............................................................
magnitude of resultant velocity ...............................................................
direction of resultant velocity (angle from the river bank) ...............................................................

[4]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22

5
(b) The mass of the canoeist is 65 kg.
Calculate her kinetic energy when travelling on still water at 2.5 m / s.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

6
4 (a) State and explain the two features of a liquid-in-glass thermometer that are necessary for
linearity.
statement 1 ...............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
statement 2 ...............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The value of the heat capacity of the hot junction of a thermocouple thermometer is important
in ensuring that it can measure temperature changes very rapidly.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The hot junction of a thermocouple thermometer has a heat capacity of 0.11 J / °C.
Calculate the thermal energy required to increase the temperature of the hot junction from
20 °C to 345 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22

7
5 Sound waves are longitudinal and electromagnetic waves are transverse.
(a) A sound wave used for a medical examination has a frequency of 1.5 MHz.
(i) State and explain what type of sound wave this is.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The wave travels through soft human tissue at a speed of 1.3 km / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave in soft human tissue.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Describe one use of X-rays in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 is a full-size ray diagram showing the formation of an image by a thin glass lens.
Fig. 6.1 (full size)
(a) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Circle three items in the list which describe the nature of the image formed.
enlarged same size diminished inverted
upright real virtual [3]
(c) State one feature of a virtual image.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22

9
BLANK PAGE

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a small plotting compass which is aligned with the magnetic field between magnetic
poles A and B of a U-shaped magnet.
A S N B
Fig. 7.1
(a) State the polarity of the poles.
pole A ........................................................................................................................................
pole B .......................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a wire, placed between two poles, carrying a current in the direction of the
arrow.
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the wire due to the magnetic
field. [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22

11
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows a β-particle moving in the direction of the arrow between the same two poles.
S
β-particle
N
direction of travel of β-particle
when in the position shown
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the β-particle due to the
magnetic field. [2]
[Total: 5]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a 60 Hz alternating current (a.c.) power
supply varies with time.
e.m.f.
0
0 time
time period
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate the time period of the a.c.
time period = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows this power supply connected in a circuit.
A B C
Fig. 8.2
(i) State the name of component A.
.......................................................... [1]
(ii) In each time period of the a.c., 1.5 × 1017 electrons pass through component A. The
charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Calculate the average current in the circuit during one time period.
current = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22
13
(c) On Fig. 8.3:
1. mark, with an arrow labelled E, the direction of the electron flow through component B
2. mark, with an arrow labelled I, the direction of the conventional current in component C.
A B C
Fig. 8.3
[2]
(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a circuit with components B and C connected to a direct current (d.c.) power
supply of e.m.f. 12 V.
B C
Fig. 8.4
The current in the circuit is 0.35 A.
Calculate the power delivered by the power supply to the circuit.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with a 3-position switch.
12 V
C
B
X
Y
A
Fig. 9.1
The moving part of the switch is always connected to point Y around which it pivots. The other end
of the moving part, labelled X, can be connected to one of the points A, B or C.
(a) The resistance of the motor is 2.0 Ω and the resistance of the resistor is 3.0 Ω.
Determine the current in the motor when the switch is connected to:
(i) point A
current = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) point B
current = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) point C.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Two resistors of resistance 2.0 Ω and 3.0 Ω are connected in parallel.
Calculate the combined resistance of the resistors in this arrangement.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22
15
10 Fig. 10.1 is a simplified diagram of a digital circuit. The output of logic gate Y controls a buzzer.
logic gate X
input
A
input
B
logic gate Y
Fig. 10.1
(a) Complete Table 10.1, the truth table for the circuit.
Table 10.1
input A input B output of X output of Y
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[3]
(b) Input A is the output of a humidity sensor which gives logic 1 when the humidity is high and
logic 0 when the humidity is low.
Input B is the output of a light sensor which gives logic 1 in bright light and logic 0 in darkness.
The buzzer sounds when the output of Y is logic 1.
State the conditions of humidity and light when the buzzer is on.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The output of the digital circuit alone is not able to operate the buzzer.
Ring the component from the list that must be connected between the output of the digital
circuit and the buzzer.
fuse heater relay resistor thermistor
Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
16
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows the paths of three α-particles moving towards a thin gold foil. Four gold nuclei
are shown.
gold nuclei
paths of
α-particles
(i) On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three α-particles. [3]
(ii) State the sign of the charge on the α-particles.
.......................................................... [1]
198
(b) The nuclide notation for a nucleus of gold-198 is
79
Au.
State the numbers of electrons, neutrons and protons in a neutral atom of gold-198.
number of electrons = .............................
number of neutrons = .............................
number of protons = ...............................

[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/M/J/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 9 0 5 3 9 4 8 9 8 5 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/SW) 214895/1
2
1 A car of mass m is travelling along a straight, horizontal road at a constant speed v.
At time t = 0, the driver of the car sees an obstruction in the road ahead of the car and applies the
brakes.
The car does not begin to decelerate at t = 0.
(a) Explain what is meant by deceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest one reason why the car does not begin to decelerate at t = 0.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 1.1 is the distance–time graph for the car from t = 0.
60
distance / m
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) State the property of a distance–time graph that corresponds to speed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the initial speed v of the car.
v = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22

3
(d) When the car is decelerating, there is a constant resistive force F on the car due to the
brakes.
F and is not constant.
The deceleration of the car is greater than m
Explain why:
(i) F
the deceleration of the car is greater than m
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the deceleration is not constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows water stored in a reservoir behind a hydroelectric dam.
reservoir
150 m
generator
turbine
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the water in the reservoir that is used to generate
electricity.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The turbine is 150 m below the level of the water in the reservoir.
Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the total pressure in the water at the turbine.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22

5
(ii) The turbine has a cross-sectional area of 3.5 m2.
Calculate the force exerted on the turbine by the water.
force = .......................................................... [2]
(c) The water flows to the turbine through a pipe of constant cross-sectional area.
Explain why the kinetic energy of the water in the pipe remains constant as it flows through
the pipe.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

6
3 During a picnic on a warm, dry day, a metal can of lemonade is wrapped in a damp cloth.
Evaporation cools the water in the cloth.
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how evaporation cools the water in the cloth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) As the water in the cloth cools, so does the lemonade.
Explain how electrons transfer thermal energy through the metal of the can.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22

7
4 A thermocouple is a device that is used as a thermometer.
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a beaker that contains molten sulfur at an initial temperature greater than
400 °C.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, sketch and label a diagram of a thermocouple that is used to determine the
temperature of the sulfur as it cools to room temperature.
sulfur
Fig. 4.1
[4]
(ii) Describe briefly how the temperature of the sulfur in the beaker is deduced.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State one advantage of using a thermocouple to measure temperature rather than using a
liquid-in-glass thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

8
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a kitchen tap that supplies instant boiling water.
Fig. 5.1
Cold water passes over an electric immersion heater inside the tap.
The boiling point of water is 100 °C.
(a) State what is meant by boiling point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The immersion heater is powered by the mains at a voltage of 230 V. When the tap is opened,
the heater switches on and the current in the heater is 13 A.
(i) Calculate the thermal energy produced by the heater in 60 s.
thermal energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C). The cold water that enters the tap
is at 22 °C.
Calculate the rate at which water at its boiling point emerges from the tap.
rate = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22

9
(c) The metal tap is earthed and there is a fuse in the cable that connects the heater to the
mains.
1. Explain how the earth wire protects the user.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. Explain how the fuse protects the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]

10
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a road next to the sea.
Fig. 6.1
(a) On a sunny day, the Sun warms the road.
Describe how energy from the Sun reaches the Earth and warms the road.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The temperature of the road is greater than the temperature of the sea.
The surface of the road is black.
Suggest one reason why the temperature of the road is greater than that of the sea.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The air above the road is heated by the warm road.
(i) Describe how this affects the molecules of the air.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22

11
(ii) A cyclist travelling along the road notices that a cool breeze is blowing from the sea to
the land.
Explain how convection produces this breeze. You may include a diagram if it helps your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

12
7 Fig. 7.1 is a full-scale diagram of a small nail N in front of a thin converging lens. The line L
represents the lens.
X Y
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 7.1 (full scale)
The focal length of the lens is 3.0 cm.
(a) Rays of light, parallel to XY, are travelling towards the lens.
Describe what happens to the light after it passes through the lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, mark and label with an F each of the two principal focuses of the lens. [1]
(c) The small nail N, of height 1.2 cm, is positioned 2.0 cm to the left of the lens.
(i) By drawing on Fig. 7.1, find the position of the image I of N and add image I to the
diagram. [3]
(ii) State and explain whether I is a real or a virtual image.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State the name given to a lens when it is used in this way.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22
13
8 Fig. 8.1 shows two vertical, cylindrical tubes and a cylindrical magnet all held in a vacuum.
cylindrical
magnet
plastic tube copper tube
One tube is made of plastic and the other tube is made of copper. The two cylindrical tubes have
identical dimensions.
The magnetic field of the small, cylindrical magnet is extremely strong.
Initially, the magnet is at rest at the top of the plastic tube.
The magnet is released and it falls through the plastic tube without experiencing a resistive force.
The magnet takes 0.67 s to fall to the lower end of the plastic tube.
(a) The mass of the magnet is 0.012 kg.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the magnet when it reaches the lower end of the plastic tube.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [4]
(b) The magnet is then held at the top of the copper tube and released. As it falls through the
copper tube, an electric current is generated in the copper.
(i) Explain why there is a current in the copper.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
(ii) The current in the copper produces a magnetic field of its own in the tube.
The magnet falls much more slowly in the copper tube than in the plastic tube.
Explain why the magnet falls more slowly in the copper tube.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22

15
9 Combinations of logic gates are used when digital signals are processed.
(a) Describe the difference between a digital signal and an analogue signal. You may include a
diagram if it helps your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 9.1 is the truth table for a logic gate X.
input A input B output

0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
Fig. 9.1
State the name of logic gate X and draw the symbol that represents it.
name .........................................................................................................................................
symbol
[1]
(c) Logic gate Y is identical to logic gate X.
Draw a combination of logic gates X and Y that behaves like an OR gate. Label the inputs A
and B and label the output Q.
[2]
[Total: 5]
16
10 Two of the isotopes of hydrogen are hydrogen-2 ( 12H ) and hydrogen-3 ( 13H ).
(a) (i) State one similarity in the composition of their nuclei.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how a nucleus of hydrogen-3 differs from a nucleus of hydrogen-2.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In a nuclear fusion reactor, a nucleus of hydrogen-2 fuses with a nucleus of hydrogen-3 at
an extremely high temperature. This fusion reaction produces an isotope of element X and
releases a neutron.
(i) Explain why an extremely high temperature is needed when forcing these two nuclei
together.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Using nuclide notation, complete the equation for this reaction.
2 3
1H + 1H
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/M/J/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 7 1 6 5 0 5 8 5 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/SW) 301685/2
2
1 An aeroplane accelerates along a horizontal runway before take-off.

The aeroplane accelerates for 35 s. The speed of the aeroplane when it takes off is 72 m / s.
Fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of the aeroplane varies between time t = 0 and t = 35 s.
72
speed
m/s
0
0 35
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Calculate the average acceleration of the aeroplane between t = 0 and t = 35 s.
acceleration = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) The combined mass of the aeroplane, its passengers and its fuel on take-off
is 1.1 × 105 kg.
Calculate the average resultant force on the aeroplane between t = 0 and t = 35 s.
force = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22
3
(iii) The force provided by the engines of the aeroplane is constant.
Give one possible explanation for the change in acceleration of the aeroplane between
t = 0 and t = 35 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) On Fig. 1.2, sketch a graph to show how the acceleration of the aircraft varies between
t = 0 and t = 35 s.
acceleration
0
0 35
t/s
Fig. 1.2
[3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a tennis ball approaching a tennis racket.
Fig. 2.1
The tennis ball hits the racket at a speed of 52 m / s. The average force on the ball during the
time that it is in contact with the racket is 350 N. The speed of the ball after it leaves the racket is
26 m / s in the opposite direction to the initial speed of the ball. The mass of the ball is 58 g.
(a) (i) Calculate the change in momentum of the ball while it is in contact with the racket.
change in momentum = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) State an equation which defines impulse in terms of force and time.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Calculate the time that the racket is in contact with the ball.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the difference between the values of the kinetic energy of the ball before and after
the impact with the racket.
difference in kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the cross-section of a barrage built across a tidal bay. The barrage is part of a tidal
power station.
high water
level
barrage
tidal
low water level gates bay
open sea
turbine connected to
generator
Fig. 3.1
The gates are raised to be open when the tide comes in. The gates are lowered to close when it is
high tide. Fig. 3.1 shows the water levels in the open sea and the tidal bay when it is low tide. The
gates are raised and water flows through the turbine.
(a) Complete the sentences to describe the energy transfers which take place when the gates
are opened.
Use words from the list.

tidal bay kinetic gates gravitational potential
open sea turbines water
................................................... energy of the ................................................... in the
.................................................. is transferred to ................................................. energy in the
rotating .............................................. . This energy is used in the generator to produce
electrical power. [3]
(b) State one advantage and one disadvantage of tidal power as an energy resource.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State the main source of energy for tidal energy.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer labelled thermometer X.
thermometer X
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 °C
bulb
Fig. 4.1
(i) State the physical property which varies with temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Thermometer Y has a bulb that contains twice the volume of liquid compared to
thermometer X.
State and explain how the sensitivity of thermometer Y compares with the sensitivity of
thermometer X.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) State and explain one change that can be made to the design of thermometer X to
increase its range.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A liquid-in-glass thermometer cannot measure a temperature of 1300 °C.
State a physical property which varies with temperature in a thermometer which can measure
a temperature of 1300 °C.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22

7
5 (a) Three identical dishes, A, B and C, contain an equal volume of water.
Dish A is outside in sunlight and experiences no wind during the day. Dish B is outside in
sunlight and experiences a strong wind during the day. Dish C is in a dark room.
Water evaporates from each dish. After 12 hours, a student measures the volume of water
in each dish. Dish C contains the largest volume of water and dish B contains the smallest
volume of water.
Explain, in terms of particles, why the three dishes have different volumes of water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Define specific latent heat of vaporisation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]

8
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows an insulating beaker, crushed ice, an immersion heater and a thermometer.
thermometer to the
power supply
insulating
beaker immersion heater
crushed ice
Fig. 5.1
The initial temperature of the ice is –60 °C.

The immersion heater is switched on and the temperature is recorded at equal intervals of
time.
Fig. 5.2 shows the temperature–time graph.
D
temperature
time
Fig. 5.2
Describe what occurs in each of the sections A, B, C and D.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
C ...............................................................................................................................................
D ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22

9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows wave crests and the direction of travel for a water wave approaching a barrier in a
large ripple tank.
large
ripple tank
direction of
travel
wave
crests
barrier
Fig. 6.1
The wavelength of the wave is 1.6 cm.
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw:
(i) the direction of travel of the reflected wave [1]
(ii) three successive reflected wave crests. [2]

10
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows an identical wave approaching a barrier with a gap of 1.3 cm.
large
ripple tank
wave
crests
barrier
with gap
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three successive wave crests after they pass through the gap in the barrier.
[3]
(c) The frequency of the wave is 4.0 Hz.
Calculate the speed of the wave.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22

11
7 (a) State what is meant by total internal reflection.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light from a light source in a tank containing a liquid.
tank
x
liquid ray of light
light source
Fig. 7.1
The ray of light strikes the surface of the liquid at an angle x.
(i) The refractive index of the liquid is 1.5.
Calculate the largest value of x for which total internal reflection can occur.
x = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the speed of light in the liquid.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows apparatus used to charge a metal plate by induction.
positively charged
plastic rod
metal plate
lead connected
insulator
to earth
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe and explain how the apparatus shown in Fig. 8.1 can be used to charge the metal
plate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows an electric circuit.
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of flow of electrons and explain how you
determined the direction.
explanation ......................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with an alternating current (a.c.) supply, a resistor and a diode.
Fig. 9.1
The frequency of the power supply is 50 Hz.
(a) Calculate the time period (time for one complete cycle) of the a.c. supply.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The peak potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor is 340 V.
p.d. / V
0
0 time / s
Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2:
(i) sketch a graph to show how the p.d. across the resistor varies with time for two cycles
[2]
(ii) label the p.d. axis with the value of p.d. at the peak [1]
(iii) label the time axis with two values of time. [2]
[Total: 7]

14
10 (a) A cloud chamber can be used to detect α (alpha)-particles and β (beta)-particles. Alcohol in
the cloud chamber exists as a vapour and condenses on ions produced in the air. This forms
visible tracks.
Fig. 10.1 shows the tracks when a source of α-particles and β-particles is present in the cloud
chamber.
cloud chamber
alcohol vapour
in air
source of
α-particles
and β-particles
Fig. 10.1
Some of the tracks are short and thick. Other tracks are longer and thinner.
State and explain which tracks are produced by α-particles and which tracks are produced by
β-particles.
α-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
β-particles .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A radioactive isotope of sodium (Na) is used to detect leaks from water pipes. A nucleus of
this isotope of sodium contains 11 protons and 13 neutrons. This nucleus decays by emitting
a β-particle to form a nucleus of magnesium (Mg).
(i) Describe what is meant by an isotope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22

15
(ii) Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of this isotope of sodium to magnesium.
[3]
(iii) This isotope of sodium has a half-life of 15 hours. The isotope of magnesium is stable
and does not undergo radioactive decay.
Suggest why these properties of the isotope of sodium and the isotope of magnesium
make this isotope of sodium suitable to detect leaks from water pipes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

16
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a solenoid connected to a battery.
solenoid
battery
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, draw the pattern of the magnetic field inside and around the solenoid. Indicate
the direction of the magnetic field with an arrow. [3]
(b) Electrical power is transmitted at a voltage of 400 kV. A transformer reduces the voltage to
33 kV for use by heavy industry in large factories. The number of turns on the primary coil of
the transformer is 11 000.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil of the transformer.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022 0625/43/O/N/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 8 4 4 8 2 3 2 5 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (PQ/CB) 301684/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows sea water flowing down a channel into a tank without splashing. The water is
flowing at a rate of 800 kg / min. The length and width of the tank are 3.10 m and 1.20 m. The
density of the sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
1.20 m
flowing sea water
3.10 m
channel
tank
(a) Initially, the tank is empty.
Calculate the depth of water in the tank after 1.00 minute. Give your answer to three significant
figures.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
(b) The height of the water decreases by 0.420 m as it flows down the channel.
Calculate the decrease in gravitational potential energy of the water each second.
decrease in gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [3]
(c) The water stops flowing. The depth of water in the tank is 0.800 m.
Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the tank due to the water.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22
3
2 (a) A pendulum swings with a time period of approximately one second.
Describe how to use a stop-watch to determine the time period of the pendulum.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Complete Table 2.1 by writing in each space of the right-hand column which one of the
following devices is used to measure the quantity in the left-hand column.
digital balance measuring cylinder metre rule
micrometer screw gauge stop-watch thermocouple
Table 2.1
quantity device
volume of water in a glass
width of a small swimming pool
thickness of a piece of aluminium foil

[3]
[Total: 6]

4
3 (a) Tidal power derives most of its energy from the Moon and part of its energy from the Sun.
(i) State one other source of power which derives its energy from the Sun.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one source of power which does not derive its energy from the Sun.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a small water turbine driven by a tidal flow of water to generate electrical
power.
surface of sea
flow of water
sea bed
Fig. 3.1
(i) Explain whether this method of generation of electrical power is renewable.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The mass of water passing through the turbine each second is 6.0 × 103 kg. The speed
of the water is 2.0 m / s. 40% of the kinetic energy of the water is converted to electrical
energy.
Calculate the electrical power generated.
power = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22

5
4 (a) Explain, in terms of the momentum of particles, how a gas exerts a pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The temperature of a sample of gas is increased at constant volume.
State and explain any change in the pressure of the gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Another sample of gas is in a sealed container of volume 170 cm3 and exerts a pressure of
9.0 × 104 Pa. The volume of the container decreases by 70 cm3 at constant temperature.
Calculate the new pressure of the gas.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 Fig. 5.1 shows an aluminium block after leaving a furnace in a factory.
furnace
aluminium block
factory worker
solid metal rollers
Fig. 5.1
(a) The mass of the block is 1200 kg and it is heated in the furnace from 20 °C to 380 °C. The
aluminium block does not melt.
The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 960 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the block in the furnace.
thermal energy = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a factory worker standing 3 m from the block.
State and explain the main process by which thermal energy is transferred to the worker.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22

7
(c) State and explain the main process by which thermal energy is transferred from the outer
surface of the solid metal rollers to their interior.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a converging lens and an object OX. The focuses of the lens are labelled F.
F F
O
principal axis
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, carefully draw two rays from X which locate the image of the object. Draw the
image and label it IY.
Measure the distance from IY along the principal axis to the centre line of the lens.
distance = ...............................................................
[4]
(ii) State two reasons why the image IY is virtual.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22

9
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of green light passing into, through and out of a glass prism.
Fig. 6.2
A ray of blue light is incident on the prism on the same path as the incident ray of green light.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through and out of the prism. [3]
[Total: 9]

10
7 This question is about the magnetic fields around bar magnets. Fig. 7.1 shows two positions used
by a student doing an experiment.
position 1 position 2
Fig. 7.1
(a) Fig. 7.2 shows a magnet, labelled magnet 1, placed on position 1.
magnet 1 position 2
S N
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2, draw lines to show the pattern of the magnetic field produced by magnet 1.
Place arrows on the lines to show the direction of the field. [3]
(b) Magnet 1 is removed from position 1. Fig. 7.3 shows another magnet, labelled magnet 2,
placed on position 2.
position 1 magnet 2
N S
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3, draw, at the right-hand end of position 1, a line with an arrow to show the direction
of the magnetic field produced by magnet 2. [1]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22

11
(c) Fig. 7.4 shows magnet 1 placed on position 1 and magnet 2 placed on position 2.
magnet 1 magnet 2
S N N S
Fig. 7.4
(i) State the direction of the force that the N pole of magnet 2 exerts on the N pole of
magnet 1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Justify your answer to (c)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit.
Y V
Fig. 8.1
(a) The light intensity at the circuit increases from dark to bright.
State any effect on the resistance of component Y.
...................................................................................................................................................
State and explain any effect on the reading of the voltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The circuit shown in Fig. 8.2 is switched on for 2.0 min.
12 V
4.0 Ω
Fig. 8.2
The current in the 4.0 Ω resistor is 3.0 A and the magnitude of the charge on an electron is
1.6 × 10–19 C.
(i) Calculate the number of electrons that pass through the resistor each second.
number = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Calculate the power dissipated by the resistor.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22
13
9 (a) Draw the symbol for:
(i) a diode
[1]
(ii) a NOT gate.
[1]
(b) (i) Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit.
Z
I1 O
I2
Fig. 9.1
Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
I1 I2 Z O
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[2]
(ii) State another single gate which is equivalent to the part of the circuit between I1 and Z.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
(c) Using two logic gates, design and draw a digital circuit with two inputs and two outputs which
has the truth table shown in Table 9.2.
Use either the usual logic gate symbols or correctly labelled square boxes in your diagram.
Table 9.2
input 1 input 2 output 1 output 2
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 1
1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22

15
10 (a) The magnitude of the charge on a β (beta)-particle is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
(i) State the proton number and nucleon number of an α (alpha)-particle.
proton number ...................................................................................................................
nucleon number ................................................................................................................

[2]
(ii) Determine the magnitude of the charge of an α (alpha)-particle.
charge ...............................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) A nucleus of radium-230 consists of 88 protons and 142 neutrons. Radium-230 is radioactive
and decays by β (beta)-emission to an isotope of actinium. The symbol for radium is Ra and
the symbol for actinium is Ac.
Write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[3]
(c) The half-life of radium-230 is 93 min. A sample contains 9.6 × 10–12 g of radium-230.
Calculate the mass of radium in the sample after 279 min.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 0625/42/O/N/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 2 4 5 9 8 2 4 0 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/SG) 301683/2
2
1 Two blocks, A and B, are joined by a thin thread that passes over a frictionless pulley. Block A is at
rest on a rough horizontal surface and block B is held at rest, just below the pulley.
Fig. 1.1 shows the thread hanging loose.
pulley
block A thread
block B
rough horizontal surface
Block B is released and it falls vertically. The thread remains loose until block B has fallen a
distance of 0.45 m.
The mass of block B is 0.50 kg.
(a) Calculate the change in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of block B as it falls through
0.45 m.
change in g.p.e. ......................................................... [2]
(b) The mass of block A is 2.0 kg.
When the thread tightens, it pulls on block A which moves to the right at a speed of 0.60 m / s.
(i) Calculate the impulse exerted on block A as it accelerates from rest to 0.60 m / s.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

3
(ii) Both of the blocks now move at a constant speed of 0.60 m / s until block B hits the
ground and the thread becomes loose.
Explain the energy change that takes place in block A after block B stops moving.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 A force is a vector quantity.
(a) (i) State two features of a vector quantity.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State the names of two other quantities that are vectors.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A student suspends a spring from a clamp stand and measures the length l0 of the spring.
Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus.
l0
The student then suspends loads of different weights from the spring and measures the
length of the spring for each load. He then plots a graph of the length of the spring against
weight.
Fig. 2.2 is the graph that the student plots.
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

5
0.80
length / m
0.60
0.40
0.20
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
weight / N
Fig. 2.2
(i) Using Fig. 2.2, determine the initial length l0 of the spring.
l0 = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the limit of proportionality and, using Fig. 2.2, determine the
weight of the load that causes this spring just to reach the limit of proportionality.
limit of proportionality ........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
weight = .............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii) Using Fig. 2.2, determine the spring constant of this spring.
spring constant = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

6
3 A rock climber, of total mass 62 kg, holds herself in horizontal equilibrium against a vertical cliff.
She pulls on a rope that is fixed at the top of the cliff and presses her feet against the cliff.
Fig. 3.1 shows her position.
rope
cliff
0.90 m
60°
rock climber
1.2 m
centre of mass
(a) Calculate the total weight of the climber.
weight = ......................................................... [1]
(b) State the two conditions needed for equilibrium.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The climber’s centre of mass is 0.90 m from the cliff.
(i) Calculate the moment about her feet due to her weight.
moment = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

7
(ii) The line of the rope meets the horizontal line through her centre of mass at a distance of
1.2 m from the cliff, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The rope is at an angle of 60° to the horizontal.
Determine the tension in the rope.
tension = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

8
4 A quantity of gas is trapped by a piston in a cylinder with thin metal walls. The piston is free to
move without friction within the cylinder.
Fig. 4.1 shows the cylinder and piston.
gas
cylinder
piston
Fig. 4.1
The cylinder is placed inside a freezer.
(a) The air in the freezer is at atmospheric pressure, which is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The area of the piston
in contact with the air in the freezer is 2.4 × 10–3 m2.
(i) Calculate the force exerted on the piston by the air in the freezer.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) When the cylinder is first placed into the freezer, the temperature of the gas in the
cylinder decreases and the air pushes the piston into the cylinder.
Calculate the work done on the piston by the air in the freezer as the air pushes the
piston a distance of 0.021 m into the cylinder.
work done = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The initial temperature of the cylinder and the gas is 21 °C and, in the freezer, the temperature
of the cylinder decreases to –18 °C.
The thermal capacity of the cylinder is 89 J / °C.
Calculate the change in the internal energy of the cylinder.
change in internal energy = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

9
(c) When the temperature reaches –18 °C, the pressure of the gas in the cylinder is still equal to
that of the atmosphere.
Explain, in terms of the particles of the gas, how the pressure remains equal to its original
value.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) As the temperature of the metal cylinder decreases, the volume of the metal decreases. The
decrease in the volume of the metal is much less than the decrease in the volume of the gas.
Explain, in terms of the particles of the metal, why the decrease in the volume of the metal is
less than that of the gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a heater in a bathroom.
heater
Fig. 5.1
The heater is at a very high temperature and it glows red. The manufacturer states:
“The heater emits light and radiation and it transfers thermal energy by radiation.”
(a) State the part of the electromagnetic spectrum that transfers thermal energy.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State:
(i) one way in which visible light and the radiation identified in (a) are similar
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) one way in which visible light differs from the radiation identified in (a).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

11
(c) Some surfaces are better at emitting radiation than others.
(i) Describe an experiment to show whether a black surface or a white surface is the better
emitter of radiation. You may draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) To ensure that the conclusion reached in the experiment in (c)(i) is correct, several
details of the experiment must be identical when testing the two different surfaces.
State two quantities in the experiment that you described that must be identical during
the test.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

12
6 The red light produced by a laser is monochromatic.
(a) State what is meant by monochromatic.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The red light from the laser hits the curved surface of a semicircular transparent plastic block
at point P and passes into the plastic.
The red light travels through the plastic and hits the straight edge of the block at its midpoint M.
Fig. 6.1 shows that some of the light is reflected and that some light travels in the air along
the straight edge of the plastic block.
laser
reflected light
P
red light
plastic block
37°
Fig. 6.1
The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
(i) Explain why the red light does not change direction as it enters the plastic block.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) At M, the angle between the red light in the plastic and the normal is 37°.
Calculate the speed of the red light in the plastic.
speed = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

13
(iii) In the plastic, blue light travels slightly slower than red light and so the critical angle for
blue light is smaller than the critical angle for red light.
The laser that emits red light is replaced by one that emits blue light. Now blue light
enters the block at P and hits the straight edge at M.
Explain what happens to the blue light after it hits the straight edge at M.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

14
7 The electric starter motor in a car is switched on and off using a relay.
The relay consists of a plastic case and two flexible springy strips, X and Y, which are made of
soft iron. These iron strips act as the switch when a circuit is connected between the terminals W
and Z.
Fig. 7.1 shows X, Y and the plastic case.
W W
S
springy iron
X strips X
12 V car
battery
Y Y
magnetising coil
plastic case
Z Z
Fig. 7.1 Fig. 7.2
Fig. 7.2 shows the equipment from Fig. 7.1 inside a magnetising coil. The magnetising coil is in
series with the 12 V car battery and switch S, which is open.
(a) Switch S is now closed.
Explain what happens to the springy iron strips X and Y.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The power of the starter motor is 1.8 kW and it is also operated by the car battery.
(i) Calculate the current in the starter motor when it is used.
current = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

15
(ii) The starter motor circuit is connected between terminals W and Z.
Explain why copper wires with a large cross-sectional area are used for this circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows the relay and the symbols for the car battery and the starter motor.
W
S
12 V car
battery
Y
M
starter motor
Fig. 7.3
The springy iron strips X and Y act as the switch for the starter motor circuit.
Complete the circuit diagram for the motor circuit. [2]
[Total: 9]

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

17
8 The unit of the two electrical quantities electromotive force (e.m.f.) and potential difference (p.d.)
is the volt (V).
(a) State one other similarity between e.m.f. and p.d.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State one difference between e.m.f. and p.d.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A battery consists of four cells, each of e.m.f. 1.2 V, in series.
(i) Calculate the e.m.f. of the battery.
e.m.f. = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) The battery is connected in a circuit with four 12 Ω resistors. Fig. 8.1 is the circuit diagram.
Fig. 8.1
Calculate the total resistance of this arrangement of resistors.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(iii) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter in Fig. 8.1.
reading = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

18
9 Only one isotope of gold occurs naturally on Earth.
(a) State what this indicates about the nuclear structure of all the naturally occurring atoms of
gold on Earth.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) There are several artificially produced isotopes of gold.
Gold-198 (198
79 Au) is an artificial isotope which is used in medicine and in scientific research.
Gold-198 decays by β (beta)-emission to a stable isotope of mercury.
(i) Determine the number of protons and the number of neutrons in a nucleus of this isotope
of mercury.
number of protons = ...............................................................
number of neutrons = ...............................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

19
(ii) A sample of gold-198 is placed near to a radiation detector in a research laboratory. The
count rate is recorded at the same time every day for 32 days.
The results are used to plot the graph shown in Fig. 9.1.
400
count rate
counts / min
300
200
100
0
0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
time / days
Fig. 9.1
Using Fig. 9.1, determine the background count rate in the research laboratory.
count rate = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) Using Fig. 9.1, determine the half-life of gold-198.
half-life = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022 0625/41/O/N/22

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 9 5 7 5 9 0 2 6 3 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
DC (EF/SG) 321611/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23

3
1 (a) A boat crosses a river. The boat points at right angles to the river bank and it travels at a
speed of 3.5 m / s relative to the water.
A river current acts at right angles to the direction the boat points. The river current has a
speed of 2.5 m / s.
By drawing a scale diagram or by calculation, determine the speed and direction of the boat
relative to the river bank.
speed = ...............................................................
direction relative to the river bank = ...............................................................

[4]
(b) Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity.
State the names of one other scalar quantity and one other vector quantity.
scalar quantity ..........................................................................................................................
vector quantity ..........................................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 6]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a ship loaded with containers.
containers
ship
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) The ship is made of steel.
The density of steel is 7800 kg / m3 and the density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Explain why the ship floats in the water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The containers with the greatest mass are loaded near the bottom of the ship.
State and explain the effect on the stability of the ship of loading the containers in this way.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A crane lifts a container 48 m vertically upwards. The mass of the container is 30 000 kg.
Calculate the energy transferred to the gravitational potential energy stored in the container.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23
5
3 (a) State the principle of conservation of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A wind turbine has a maximum output power of 1.8 MW. The turbine operates at maximum
power for 4.0 h.
(i) Define the unit kW h.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the energy produced by the wind turbine operating at maximum power for
4.0 h. Give your answer in kW h.
energy = ................................................. kW h [2]
(c) Radiation from the Sun is the main source of energy for most of our energy resources.
State two energy resources that are not due to radiation from the Sun.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a metal pan on an electric hotplate. The pan contains 200 cm3 of water.
water
metal pan
hotplate
Fig. 4.1
The pan is heated. The temperature of the water in the pan increases.
(a) Thermal energy is transferred through the metal pan by conduction.
State and explain the two ways that thermal energy is conducted in a metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) (i) The water boils and leaves the liquid as a gas.
Explain, in terms of forces and distances between particles, why the gas occupies a
much greater volume than it does as a liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23

7
(c) The water is replaced with 200 cm3 of milk.
The initial temperature of the milk is 20.0 °C. The boiling point of milk is 95.0 °C.
The milk starts to boil when 60 700 J of thermal energy has been transferred to it. The density
of milk is 1.03 g / cm3.
Calculate the value of the specific heat capacity of milk. Give your answer to 3 significant
figures.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 11]

8
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a semicircular transparent plastic block.
semicircular
transparent
plastic block
Fig. 5.1
A ray of light is incident normally on the curved surface of the block. The refractive index of
the plastic is 1.5.
(i) Calculate the critical angle for the plastic.
critical angle = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, draw the path of the ray in the block and after the ray emerges from the
block. [2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 is a full‑scale diagram of a lens and an object O.
lens
F O
Fig. 5.2
The point marked F shows the position of a principal focus of the lens.
(i) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.2, draw two rays from the object to locate the image. Label the image I. [3]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23
9
(c) Fig. 5.3 shows a simplified diagram of an eye with rays from a distant object and the path of
the rays inside the eye of a person with short sight.
retina
lens
Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.4, draw an additional lens outside the eye to correct short‑sightedness and show
the path of the rays inside the eye.
Fig. 5.4
[2]
[Total: 10]

10
6 (a) Sound waves have compressions and rarefactions.
Explain what is meant by compression and rarefaction.
compression .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) We can see light from the Sun but we cannot hear any sound from it.
State the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) During a thunderstorm, an observer sees the lightning almost immediately but hears the
sound of the thunder several seconds later. The thunder and lightning are produced at the
same time.
The sound of the thunder is heard 9.0 s after the lightning is seen. The speed of sound in air
is 340 m / s.
Calculate the distance from the thunderstorm to the observer.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23

11
(d) In a lightning strike, there is a current of 3.0 × 104 A for 48 ms.
Calculate the charge that flows.
charge = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

12
7 (a) Define potential difference (p.d.).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) State the equation which defines electromotive force (e.m.f.) E.
[1]
(ii) The e.m.f. of a battery is 9.0 V. The battery is in a circuit.
Calculate the work done by the battery when it moves a charge of 30 C around a complete
circuit.
work done = ......................................................... [2]
(c) A circuit consists of a d.c. power supply, a lamp and a thermistor.
(i) Draw a circuit diagram of these components connected in series.
[2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23

13
(ii) Explain what happens in the circuit you have drawn in (c)(i) when the temperature of the
thermistor is increased.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a horizontal, flat coil in a magnetic field
coil
axis
B
N A
Fig. 8.1
The coil is connected to a cell. The coil rotates.
(a) Determine the direction of movement of the side AB relative to the plane of the coil.
direction of movement = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Explain how you determined the direction in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain what happens to the coil as it reaches the vertical position.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) To operate as a motor, a split‑ring commutator and brushes are added to the parts shown in
Fig. 8.1.
Explain the effects of the split‑ring commutator and the brushes on the action of the motor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23

15
9 (a) A nuclear power station has a reactor where controlled nuclear fission of uranium‑235 takes
place.
(i) Explain what is meant by nuclear fission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State one advantage and one disadvantage of generating electrical power in nuclear
power stations compared with electrical power generated using wind turbines.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Deuterium is an isotope of hydrogen (H) with 1 proton and 1 neutron. Nuclear fusion occurs
when two nuclei of deuterium combine. An isotope of helium (He) and a neutron are formed.
Use nuclide notation to write down the nuclide equation for this reaction.
[3]
[Total: 8]

16
10 (a) The time taken for Mars to orbit the Sun is 690 Earth days. The average orbital radius of Mars
is 2.28 × 108 km. An Earth day is 24 h.
Calculate the average orbital speed of Mars in km / s.
average speed = ......................................................... [3]
(b) State the shape of the orbits of the planets.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Light from a distant galaxy is redshifted.
(i) Explain what is meant by redshift.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the quantity that the redshift of a galaxy is used to calculate.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/F/M/23

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 3 8 0 2 1 7 3 2 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CE/FC) 315743/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a balloon filled with helium gas.
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the balloon is 120 kg.
(a) Calculate the weight of the balloon. Show your working.
weight = ......................................................... [1]
(b) The resultant force on the balloon is 54 N.
Show that the acceleration of the balloon is 0.45 m / s2.
[2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

3
(c) The balloon accelerates upwards from rest at 0.45 m / s2 for 8.0 s.
Calculate the velocity of the balloon after 8.0 s.
velocity = ......................................................... [2]
(d) Calculate the distance travelled by the balloon in the first 8.0 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

4
2 (a) (i) Define pressure.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how pressure in a liquid varies with its depth and with its density.
variation with depth
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
variation with density
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two energy resources for which the Sun is not the main source.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State and explain whether each of the following methods of electrical power generation is
renewable.
(i) power generation in a nuclear power station
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) power generation from waves in the sea
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

5
3 (a) (i) State which state of matter, solid, liquid or gas, has the greatest thermal expansion and
which has the least.
greatest expansion ...........................................
least expansion ................................................

[2]
(ii) Describe, in terms of the motion and arrangement of particles, the structures of solids
and gases.
solids .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
gases .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) Define specific heat capacity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) A student carries out an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity of a metal. A
cylinder of the metal is heated by a 12 W electrical heater.
State the readings that the student takes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 is an incomplete ray diagram showing an object O, a converging lens and the principal
axis. The focal points of the lens are each labelled F.
F F
O
Fig. 4.1
(i) Complete the ray diagram to draw the image formed by the lens. Label your image I. [3]
(ii) Circle three descriptions in the list which describe the image formed in (i).
diminished enlarged inverted same size
real upright virtual

[3]
(b) (i) State the name for the defect of vision that can be corrected by a converging lens.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe how a converging lens corrects the defect in (i).

You may find it helpful to sketch a ray diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

7
5 (a) Two types of electromagnetic radiation are used in glass optical fibres for high-speed
broadband.
(i) State the type of electromagnetic radiation, other than visible light, which is used in glass
optical fibres.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Give two reasons why these two types of electromagnetic radiation are used in glass
optical fibres for high-speed broadband.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) The critical angle of the glass in an optical fibre is 45°.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Fig. 5.1 shows an optical fibre made of the glass described in (i).
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1, draw carefully a ray of light in the fibre undergoing total internal reflection.
[2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 An electric heater uses a resistance wire of resistance 26 Ω. The power dissipated in the resistance
wire is 2500 W.
(a) Calculate the current in the resistance wire.
current = ......................................................... [3]
(b) The resistance wire of the heater has a length of 1.2 m and a cross-sectional area of
7.9 × 10–7 m2.
A new heater is designed using wire of the same material with length 1.8 m and cross-
sectional area 5.8 × 10–7 m2.
Calculate the resistance of this wire.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(c) The 2500 W heater is used in a country where electricity costs 0.30 dollars per kilowatt-hour.
Calculate the cost of using the heater continuously for two days.
cost = ............................................. dollars [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

9
7 The voltage across the primary coil of a 100% efficient transformer is 220 V and the voltage across
the secondary coil is 12 V.
(a) The current in the secondary coil is 2.5 A.
Calculate the current in the primary coil.
current = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the ratio of the number of turns on the primary coil to the number of turns on the
secondary coil of the transformer.
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]

10
8 (a) During β-decay, one of the neutrons in the nucleus changes.
(i) State what happens to this neutron.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain how charge is conserved during this change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Complete the nuclide equation for the α-decay of radon-212 to form an isotope of polonium,
symbol Po.
212
86
Rn
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

11
BLANK PAGE

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the Sun as the central dot and the planets Saturn, Jupiter and Earth labelled S0,
J0 and E0. The planets orbit the Sun anticlockwise. From the Earth’s orbit, the planets appear
aligned.
S0
J0
E0
Assume that Saturn takes 30 years to orbit the Sun and that Jupiter takes 12 years to orbit the
Sun.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, mark the positions of Saturn and Jupiter 5.0 years after the original positions
shown.
Label these positions S1 and J1. Show your working.
[3]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

13
(b) (i) On Fig. 9.1, mark the positions of Saturn and Jupiter 20 years after the original positions
shown in Fig. 9.1.
Label these positions S2 and J2.
[1]
(ii) State what is observed from the Earth’s orbit after 20 years.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i) Choose two words from the list to describe each planet.
gaseous large rocky small
Jupiter ...............................................................................................................................
Earth ..................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) The average density of Jupiter is much less than that of the Earth.
The gravitational field strength at the surface of Jupiter is greater than that at the surface
of the Earth.
Explain how these differences in density and in gravitational field strength are consistent
with your answers to (c)(i).
density
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
gravitational field strength
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]

14
(d) The average density of Jupiter is 1300 kg / m3 and its volume is 1.4 × 1015 km3.
Calculate the mass of Jupiter.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

15
10 (a) Show that 1 light-year = 9.5 × 1015 m.
[4]
(b) (i) State one measurement that is taken when determining the speed v at which a galaxy is
moving away from the Earth.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Write down an equation relating v and the distance d of a far galaxy.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State how the distance d of a far galaxy can be determined other than by using the
equation in (ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/M/J/23

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 6 9 8 3 2 6 0 5 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (LK/SG) 321610/4
2
1 (a) Oil of density 0.80 g / cm3 is poured gently onto the surface of water of density 1.0 g / cm3. The
oil and the water do not mix.
Describe and explain the final position of the oil relative to the water.
description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An irregularly shaped solid object has a density of 2.7 g / cm3.
(i) Describe a method to measure the volume of the irregularly shaped solid object.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The volume of the object is 83 cm3.
Calculate the mass of the object.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

3
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 is a graph that shows how the extension of a spring varies with the load suspended
from it.
extension / cm
4.0
0
0 14 load / N
Fig. 2.1
(i) Determine the spring constant of this spring.
spring constant = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) On Fig. 2.1, mark the limit of proportionality and label this point L. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a car travelling at constant speed around corner A on a road.
corner B corner A
CA
R
Fig. 2.2
(i) On Fig. 2.2, mark with an arrow the direction of the resultant force acting on the car as it
travels around corner A. [2]
(ii) Corner B has a smaller radius than corner A. The car travels at the same speed around
corner B as around corner A.
State how the resultant force changes due to the car travelling around a corner of smaller
radius.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a boy throwing a ball at an object in a fairground.
object
Fig. 3.1
The ball has a mass of 190 g and travels horizontally with a constant speed of 6.9 m / s.
(a) Calculate the momentum of the ball.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) After hitting the object, the ball bounces back along the same straight path with a speed of
1.5 m / s. The object has a mass of 1.8 kg.
Calculate the speed of the object after it is hit by the ball.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

5
(c) The kinetic energy of the ball is 4.5 J before the collision and 0.2 J after the collision.
Calculate the change in total kinetic energy of the ball and object during the collision.
change in total kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

6
4 (a) The lowest possible temperature is zero kelvin (0 K).
(i) State the name of this lowest possible temperature.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Nitrogen boils at 77 K.
Calculate the boiling point of nitrogen on the Celsius scale.
boiling point = .................................................... °C [2]
(b) The temperature of a fixed mass of gas at constant volume changes from 300 K to 400 K.
State and explain, in terms of particles, the effect on the pressure of the gas.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) A sample of gas is at a pressure of 120 kPa. The volume of the gas is doubled at constant
temperature.
Calculate the new pressure of the gas.
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

7
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 is a scale diagram of wavefronts of red light approaching a gap in a barrier.
barrier
wavelength
wavefronts
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1, draw three wavefronts after the wave has passed through the gap. [3]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the same barrier and gap. A wave of blue light approaches this barrier.
barrier
Fig. 5.2
On Fig. 5.2:
• draw three wavefronts of this wave before it reaches the barrier

• draw three wavefronts after the wave passes through the gap.
[3]
[Total: 6]

8
6 (a) On Fig. 6.1, sketch the current–voltage graph of a filament lamp and explain its shape.
Fig. 6.1
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows an electric circuit.
12.0 V 3.0 V
+ –
A 4.2 Ω
2.1 Ω
V
Fig. 6.2
(i) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

9
(ii) Calculate the current in the 4.2 Ω resistor.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Determine the current in the 2.1 Ω resistor.
current = ......................................................... [1]
(iv) Determine the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ......................................................... [1]
(v) Calculate the electrical power transferred in the 4.2 Ω resistor.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows the electric field pattern around point X.
Y
X
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow to indicate the direction of the force on a negative point
charge placed at point Y. [2]
(ii) State what is at point X to produce the field pattern shown in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A piece of plastic is charged positively by friction.
State what charge transfers occur during this process.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Explain how the structure of an electrical conductor differs from the structure of an electrical
insulator.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

11
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows the single turn coil of a simple direct current (d.c.) motor.
S N
current coil
O
Fig. 8.1
(i) Explain the direction of the turning effect as seen by an observer at O.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The coil is replaced by an otherwise identical new coil with three turns and the same
current in the coil.
State how the turning effect compares with the turning effect in (i).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) A third coil is identical to the coil in (i) except that its resistance is three times greater.
The potential difference (p.d.) across the coil is the same as the p.d. in (i).
State how the turning effect compares with the turning effect in (i).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

12
(b) Fig. 8.2 is a voltage–time graph showing the output of a simple alternating current (a.c.)
generator at times t0, t1, t2 and t3.
voltage
time
t0 t1 t2 t3
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.3 is an end view of the plane of the coil of the generator at time t0. The coil is rotating
clockwise.
A
axis of rotation
Fig. 8.3
(i) Draw an end view of the position of the plane of the coil at time t1. Include the labels
A and B.
[1]
(ii) Draw an end view of the position of the plane of the coil at time t2. Include the labels
A and B.
[1]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

13
(iii) Draw an end view of the position of the plane of the coil at time t3. Include the labels
A and B.
[1]
[Total: 7]

14
9 (a) For each application of radioactive isotopes, state and explain which type of radioactive
emission is suitable and suggest an appropriate half-life for the isotope.
(i) household smoke alarm
type of radioactive emission ..............................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
half-life ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) measuring the thickness of aluminium strips produced in a factory
type of radioactive emission ..............................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
half-life ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Lead-208 (208

82Pb) has the highest nucleon number of the stable isotopes of lead.
Explain why lead-214 (214

82Pb) is radioactive.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State two different sources of background radiation.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

15
10 (a) (i) 1. State what is represented in space physics by the symbol H0.
............................................................................................................................... [1]
2. Write down the equation that defines H0 in terms of the speed that a far galaxy is
moving away from the Earth and its distance from the Earth.
............................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The numerical value of H0 is 2.2 × 10–18. State the unit of H0.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Use this value of H0 to determine an estimate for the age of the Universe in seconds.
age of the Universe = ...................................................... s [2]
(b) State when cosmic microwave background radiation (CMBR) was formed and where we
detect it coming from.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 0625/43/O/N/23

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 6 7 1 3 1 8 1 1 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/FC) 318547/5
2
1 A car accelerates uniformly in a straight line from rest at time t = 0. At t = 3.2 s, the speed of the car
is 13.0 m / s.
(a) (i) Calculate the acceleration of the car.
acceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain in words what is meant by the term acceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The car travels at 13.0 m / s from t = 3.2 s to t = 12.0 s.
(i) Plot the speed–time graph for the car from t = 0 to t = 12.0 s.
14.0
speed 12.0
m/s
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
t/s
[2]
(ii) Determine the distance travelled by the car between t = 0 and t = 3.2 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23
3
(c) The car decelerates from 13.0 m / s to 0 m / s at a constant deceleration. The mass of the car is
1350 kg. The car travels 13 m in 2.0 s as it decelerates.
Show that the work done by the car as it decelerates is approximately 1.1 × 105 J.
[4]
(d) On another day, the car in (c) travels a longer distance while it decelerates from 13.0 m / s to
0 m / s. The deceleration is constant.
Suggest and explain what causes the stopping distance to increase.
suggestion ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an electric tumble dryer used to dry wet clothes.
drum
hot air blows

into drum
clothes
heating element
cool air
condenser leaves condenser
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) Hot air blows into the drum. The air gains water vapour from the clothes and then leaves the
drum. The moist air enters the condenser. Cool air leaves the condenser, passes through the
heating element and enters the drum again.
(i) State the process by which the hot air removes water from the wet clothes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The air is cooled as it passes through the condenser.
Describe and explain one other way in which the air leaving the condenser is different
from the air entering the condenser.
description .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The drum of the tumble dryer rotates, lifting up the wet clothes which then fall down through
the hot air.
(i) Name the force that causes the clothes to fall down.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When the drum rotates too fast the clothes remain in contact with the wall of the drum.
State the direction of the resultant force on the clothes during the circular motion.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23

5
(c) Suggest why using a clothesline to dry clothes in the open air is better for the environment
than using an electric tumble dryer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

6
3 (a) A balloon of mass 15 g is glued to a straw. The straw is threaded onto a horizontal string, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
The balloon is filled with air and then the air is released.
horizontal
string direction of motion of balloon
hollow straw fixed to balloon
balloon
Fig. 3.1
As the air leaves the balloon, the balloon experiences a force.

The balloon accelerates from rest until it reaches a constant speed. It then travels 0.67 m in
0.18 s at this constant speed.
(i) Explain in words what is meant by the term impulse.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the resultant impulse on the balloon while it is accelerating.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain how momentum is conserved as the balloon accelerates.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23

7
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the directions of two forces acting on a different balloon as it moves.
0.40 N force
0.74 N force
Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the balloon.
magnitude ...............................................................
direction relative to horizontal force ...............................................................

[4]
[Total: 10]
8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a bottle part-filled with water. The air inside the bottle is at the same pressure as
the air outside the bottle. The bottle and its contents are at room temperature.
bottle
air
water
Fig. 4.1
(a) The temperature of the bottle and its contents are increased.
(i) Explain, in terms of particles, how the air pressure inside the bottle changes as the
temperature increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The lid is removed from the bottle.
State and explain how the air pressure inside the bottle changes.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23

9
(b) The mass of water in the bottle is 0.18 kg. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy needed to increase the temperature of the water by 20 °C.
thermal energy = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Another plastic bottle is filled to the top with water. The height of the bottle is 40.0 cm. The
density of water is 1.0 × 103 kg / m3.
Calculate the pressure difference between the top and bottom of the water.
pressure difference = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a road junction, a moving car and a stationary truck. The road has high walls on
each side.
truck
car
Fig. 5.1
(a) The driver of the truck is at position X. The car moves around the corner.
On Fig. 5.1, label a point Y on the road where the truck driver first sees the car. [1]
(b) A plane mirror is placed at the road junction as shown in Fig. 5.2.
truck
car
Fig. 5.2
Show how this mirror allows the driver of the truck to see the car when it is at the position
shown in Fig. 5.2. [2]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23

11
(c) The truck driver wears spectacles to correct long-sightedness. Fig. 5.3 shows how a blurred
image of an object O forms on the retina. Any effect of the cornea on the rays of light can be
ignored.
lens retina
cornea
Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.4, show how long-sightedness is corrected by:
• adding a suitable lens in front of the eye

• continuing the path of the three rays of light until they meet to form an image.
lens retina
Fig. 5.4
[4]
[Total: 7]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the circuit diagram for a flashlight (torch).
Fig. 6.1
The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is 4.5 V. The circuit contains a 60 Ω fixed resistor.
The current in the light-emitting diode (LED) is 0.020 A.
(a) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the LED.
p.d. = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why the LED does not light up if the battery is reversed.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The chemical energy stored in the battery is 1050 J.
Show that the flashlight operates for approximately 3 h.
[2]
(d) Calculate the total charge that flows through the LED in 3600 s.
charge = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23

13
7 Fig. 7.1 shows some uses of electromagnetic radiation and different regions of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
use of electromagnetic region of electromagnetic

radiation spectrum
Bluetooth headset gamma rays
thermal imaging radio waves
photography of
people’s faces infrared
sterilising medical visible light

equipment
Fig. 7.1
(a) Draw a line from each use to the correct region of the spectrum. Each region of the spectrum
is used once. One line has been completed for you. [2]
(b) State the speed of electromagnetic waves in a vacuum.
speed = ......................................................... [1]
(c) A Bluetooth headset can be used to listen to music on a mobile (cell) phone without the need
for wires to connect the headset to the phone.
(i) The headset uses frequencies in the range 2.40–2.48 GHz.
Calculate the wavelength of the radio waves when the frequency is in the middle of the
frequency range.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Suggest why a Bluetooth headset only works well over short distances.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]

14
8 The isotope uranium-235 is represented by

235
92 U.
(a) State what the numbers 92 and 235 represent in this symbol.
92 is ..........................................................................................................................................
235 is ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Uranium-235 is a fuel used in nuclear reactors.
(i) State the process by which energy is released from uranium-235 in a nuclear reactor.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A nuclide equation for this process is

235 1 140 94 1
92 U + 0n 54 Xe + 38 Sr + 2 0 n.
Describe the mass and energy changes that take place during this process in a nuclear
reactor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) Describe how thermal energy from nuclear reactions is used to generate electricity in a
power station.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using nuclear fuels in a power station
instead of using fossil fuels.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23

15
9 Table 9.1 gives information about three planets in the Solar System.
Table 9.1
planet mass average orbital gravitational field strength at surface

/ 1024 kg distance period N / kg
from Sun / days
/ 106 km
Earth 5.97 149.6 365.2 9.8
Jupiter 1898 778.6 4331 23.1
X 4.87 108.2 224.7 8.9
(a) State the name of planet X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Describe the relationship shown in Table 9.1 between the mass of a planet and the
gravitational field strength at its surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Explain why ‘distance from Sun’ in Table 9.1 is an average value.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Show that the average orbital speed of the Earth is approximately 30 km / s.
[3]
[Total: 6]

16
10 Complete the sentences about the life cycle of stars.
(a) Protostars are formed from .......................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A protostar becomes a stable star when ...................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
is balanced by ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The initial fuel used to power nuclear reactions in stars is .................................................... [1]
(d) Stars that are approximately the same size as the Sun become red giant stars which then
form a ........................................................................................................................................
with a white dwarf star at its centre. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2023 0625/42/O/N/23

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 6 1 8 3 5 4 3 9 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (SL) 335358/3 R
2
1 A girl holds a rubber ball out of a window of a tall building. The mass of the ball is 0.20 kg. The ball
is at rest 10 m above a concrete path.
(a) Calculate the gravitational potential energy of the ball relative to the concrete path.
gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The girl releases the ball and it falls towards the path. The ball strikes the path and bounces
vertically upwards.
Fig. 1.1 shows the ball falling towards the path.
ball
10 m
concrete path
Fig. 1.1
The speed of the ball immediately before it strikes the path is 14 m / s.
The speed of the ball immediately after it strikes the path is 12 m / s.
(i) Calculate the kinetic energy of the ball immediately after it strikes the concrete path.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Show that the change in momentum of the ball when it bounces off the path is 5.2 kg m / s.
[3]
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23
3
(iii) The ball is in contact with the path for 0.25 s.
Calculate the average resultant force on the ball when it is in contact with the path.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 A copper cooking pan contains water. Fig. 2.1 shows the pan on a hotplate of a cooker.
Fig. 2.1
Copper is a metal.
(a) Thermal energy is conducted through all solids by lattice vibrations.
Describe one other way in which thermal energy is conducted through the copper.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The outside surface of the cooking pan is kept clean by regular polishing.
Explain one other advantage of keeping the surface of the pan shiny.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The thermal energy passes into the water through the base of the pan.
Identify the main method by which thermal energy is transferred throughout the water.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23

5
3 Liquids are difficult to compress whereas gases can be compressed easily.
(a) Explain, in terms of particles, why it is difficult to compress liquids.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block floating in water. The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
rectangular block
atmosphere
water
0.087 m
base
Fig. 3.1
The area of the base of the block is 0.014 m2. The base of the block is at a depth of 0.087 m
below the surface of the water.
(i) Show that the pressure due to the water at the base of the block is approximately 850 Pa.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the force F on the base of the block caused by the pressure given in (b)(i).
F = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Force F is equal to the weight of the block.
Calculate the mass of the block.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
6
4 A radio transmitter is a very tall, thin cylinder. It is prevented from falling over by wires which have
one end fixed to the transmitter and the other end fixed in the ground. The ends of the wires in the
ground are a long distance from the transmitter.
Fig. 4.1 shows the transmitter and two of the wires.
transmitter
wire W
base ground
Fig. 4.1
(a) The centre of gravity G is shown on Fig. 4.1.
(i) State what is meant by centre of gravity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the radio transmitter without the wires is a very unstable structure.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Wire W is under tension and it exerts a force T on the transmitter.
(i) On Fig. 4.1, mark an arrow to show the force T exerted by wire W on the transmitter. [1]
(ii) The force T produces a moment on the transmitter about its base.
Describe how the moment produced by T is calculated and indicate on Fig. 4.1 what is
meant by any other terms in the description.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23
7
(c) The radio transmitter uses radio waves to transmit radio and television programmes.
State one other use of radio waves.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

8
5 Many methods of generating electrical power involve the use of water.
(a) Describe one method of generating electrical power from energy stored in water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) For the method you chose in (a), state one advantage and one disadvantage of generating
electricity this way.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two methods of generating electrical power for which the main source of energy is not
the Sun.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23

9
6 A page of printed text is placed 18 cm from a converging lens of focal length 35 cm.
Fig. 6.1 is a scale diagram of the arrangement with each of the two principal focuses (focal points)
of the lens labelled F.
5.0 cm
5.0 cm
F F
18 cm
page of printed text
lens
Fig. 6.1
(a) A length of 1.0 cm on the scale diagram represents an actual length of 5.0 cm.
(i) By drawing on Fig. 6.1, locate the image of the page produced by the lens and label it I. [3]
(ii) Using Fig. 6.1, determine the actual distance of image I from the lens.
actual distance from lens = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Converging lenses can be used as magnifying glasses.
State whether the image produced when a lens is used as a magnifying glass is real or
virtual. Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Suggest how someone who is long-sighted may benefit from using a converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) A plastic rod is uncharged.
When the rod is rubbed with a woollen cloth, the rod becomes negatively charged.
Explain, in terms of particles, why the rod becomes negatively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a negatively charged metal sphere S.
–
– –
– –
sphere S
Fig. 7.1
There is an electric field surrounding S.
(i) State what is meant by an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, draw the pattern of the electric field surrounding sphere S and indicate its
direction. [2]
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows a small negative charge Z placed near to sphere S.
–
– –
– –
Z
sphere S
Fig. 7.2
Charge Z experiences a force due to the electric field surrounding S.
On Fig. 7.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of this force on Z. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23
11
BLANK PAGE

12
8 A cylinder is made of modelling clay. The modelling clay is an electrical conductor.
Fig. 8.1 shows the cylinder.
cross-sectional area
length
Fig. 8.1
The cylinder is connected into a circuit.
Fig. 8.2 shows that the circuit also includes a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 9.0 V and a
resistor P.
9.0 V
cylinder of modelling clay
Fig. 8.2
The resistance of P is 4.0 Ω. The current in P is 1.5 A.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the magnitude X of the charge that flows through P in 600 s
X = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the resistance of the cylinder of modelling clay.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23
13
(b) The cylinder is removed from the circuit and replaced with a new cylinder made of the same
modelling clay.
The new cylinder is twice the length and has half the cross-sectional area of the first cylinder.
Calculate the time that it now takes for a charge of magnitude X to flow through resistor P.
time = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 9]

14
9 Many household smoke alarms contain a sample of the radioactive isotope americium-241 (Am).
(a) Americium-241 is the isotope of the element americium that has the nucleon number (mass
number) 241.
(i) State how the composition of a nucleus of americium-241 differs from that of a nucleus
of americium-242.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) An atom of a different element has a nucleon number of 241.
State two differences between the composition of a nucleus of this atom and a nucleus
of americium-241.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Americium-241 decays to an isotope of neptunium (Np) by alpha-particle (α-particle) emission.
(i) Complete the equation for this decay.

241 ..... .....
.....
Am 93
Np + .....
α
[3]
(ii) One reason for using an isotope that emits α-particles in a smoke detector is that
α-particles are more strongly ionising than beta-particles (β-particles).
Explain why α-particles are more strongly ionising than β-particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The isotope of neptunium produced by americium-241 is also radioactive.
The decay of this isotope of neptunium produces an isotope of protactinium which

decays by β-emission. β-particles are more penetrating than α-particles.
The half-life of neptunium is longer than two million years.
Using this information, explain the advantage of this long half-life for the use and safe
disposal of a household smoke alarm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23

15
10 The Milky Way is one of many billions of galaxies. Each galaxy contains many billions of stable stars.
(a) Stable stars transfer energy into space by emitting electromagnetic radiation from their
surfaces.
Describe what happens in the core of a stable star to release energy that is eventually
transferred into space.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) On the Earth, light from a distant galaxy is observed and analysed by astronomers. This
information is used to determine the speed at which the galaxy is moving away from the
Earth.
(i) Describe how the observed light is different from when it was emitted.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the quantity that astronomers use to determine the speed at which the galaxy is
moving away.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The Hubble constant H0 is equal to 2.2 × 10–18 per second.
(i) Calculate the distance from the Earth of a galaxy that is moving away at a speed of
1.3 × 107 m / s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate an estimate for the age of the Universe. Give your answer in years.
age of the Universe = ............................................... years [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023 0625/41/O/N/23

Physics Paper 4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics Paper 4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics Paper 4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Answer all questions.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

1 (a) Define acceleration.

(i) The car starts from rest.

From time = 0 to time = 15 s, the car has a constant acceleration to a speed of 28 m / s.

From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the car has a constant speed of 28 m / s.

For this motion, state

1. the direction of the resultant force on the car,

2. what happens to the velocity of the car.

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

increase in g.p.e. = ......................................................... [2]

efficiency = ......................................................... [4]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18 [Turn over

3 (a) Complete the statement by writing in the blank spaces.

The moment of a force about a pivot is equal to ......................................................................

multiplied by .......................................................................................................................... [1]

(ii) Calculate the mass of the rod.

mass = ......................................................... [1]

(iii) The rod is in equilibrium.

Using data from Fig. 3.1, explain why.

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

(b) The plastic spoon is replaced by a metal spoon.

Calculate the loss of thermal energy from the liquid.

energy loss = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18 [Turn over

In the circle shown, sketch the path of this smoke particle.

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

average force = ......................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18 [Turn over

6 (a) Fig. 6.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum.

radio waves microwaves A B C D

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

(b) A source emits visible light.

(i) Calculate the angle of refraction in the glass at S.

angle of refraction = ......................................................... [2]

Label this ray B. [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18 [Turn over

Calculate the speed of the light wave in water.

speed = ......................................................... [2]

(iii) label the angle of refraction r of the light wave. [1]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

8 (a) The lamp of a car headlight is rated at 12 V, 50 W.

Calculate the current in the lamp when operating normally.

current = ......................................................... [2]

(b) A car is driven at night.

(i) Calculate the electrical energy transferred.

energy = ......................................................... [3]

volume = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18 [Turn over

resistance = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

Calculate the current from the supply.

current = ......................................................... [2]

p.d. = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18 [Turn over

When AB is moved vertically, the needle of the galvanometer shows a deflection.

State three factors that affect the size of the deflection.